184
OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform V100R004 Commissioning Guide Issue 01 Date 2008-08-01 Part Number 00440775 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

V100R004

Commissioning Guide

Issue 01

Date 2008-08-01

Part Number 00440775

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 2: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Page 3: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Preparations for Commissioning............................................................................................1-11.1 Safety Operation Guide...................................................................................................................................1-2

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety Symbols.....................................................................................................................1-21.1.2 Safe Usage of Fibers..............................................................................................................................1-31.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power on.........................................................................................1-51.1.4 ESD........................................................................................................................................................1-5

1.2 Instruments and Tools.....................................................................................................................................1-71.3 Reference Documents.....................................................................................................................................1-81.4 Engineering Design Information.....................................................................................................................1-8

1.4.1 Engineering Survey Document..............................................................................................................1-81.4.2 Engineering Design Document..............................................................................................................1-9

1.5 Commissioning Conditions Check .................................................................................................................1-91.6 Requirements of Commissioning Engineers...................................................................................................1-91.7 Testing Connection Points..............................................................................................................................1-91.8 General Commissioning Procedures.............................................................................................................1-111.9 List of Commissioning Items........................................................................................................................1-12

2 Configuring NE and Network.................................................................................................2-12.1 Connecting the NM Computer........................................................................................................................2-3

2.1.1 Connecting the T2000 Server Directly...................................................................................................2-32.1.2 Connecting the T2000 Server Through a LAN......................................................................................2-4

2.2 Starting the T2000...........................................................................................................................................2-52.2.1 Starting the T2000 Server......................................................................................................................2-62.2.2 Logging In to the T2000 Client..............................................................................................................2-6

2.3 Creating an Optical Network Element (ONE)................................................................................................2-72.4 Creating an NE................................................................................................................................................2-9

2.4.1 Searching to Create NEs......................................................................................................................2-102.4.2 Creating an NE Manually.....................................................................................................................2-11

2.5 Logging In to an NE......................................................................................................................................2-122.6 Setting NE ID and IP.....................................................................................................................................2-132.7 Creating Boards.............................................................................................................................................2-162.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface Attributes.............................................................................................2-16

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide Contents

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

i

Page 4: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.9 Synchronizing NE Time with the T2000 Server Manually...........................................................................2-182.10 Starting or Stopping Performance Monitoring of the Specified NE...........................................................2-202.11 Setting Master/Slave Subracks....................................................................................................................2-202.12 Setting Manually Extended ECC Communication......................................................................................2-232.13 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic Mode............................................................................................2-25

3 Commissioning Optical Power ...............................................................................................3-13.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical Power................................................................................................3-3

3.1.1 Basic Requirements................................................................................................................................3-33.1.2 General Commissioning Consequence...................................................................................................3-33.1.3 Commissioning Tools and Instruments..................................................................................................3-5

3.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU Board...............................................................................................3-53.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light...................................................................................................3-53.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU Board................................................................................3-6

3.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary Board........................................................................................3-73.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line Board................................................................................................3-73.5 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA OAU Board...................................................................................3-7

3.5.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OAU Board................................................................................3-83.5.2 Adjusting the Gains of OAU..................................................................................................................3-8

3.6 Commissioning Optical Power of Raman Amplifier Board.........................................................................3-103.7 Commissioning Optical Power of OSC Board..............................................................................................3-12

3.7.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC Board...............................................................................3-123.7.2 Commissioning the ESC board............................................................................................................3-13

3.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board....................................................3-143.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V Board...........................................................3-143.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU Board................................................................................3-15

3.9 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM Board.......................................................................................3-163.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board.....................................................................................3-16

3.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)..............................................3-173.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)...............................................3-193.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)................................................3-203.10.4 Adjusting the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4).................................................3-22

3.11 Commissioning Optical Power of the DCM...............................................................................................3-243.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power................................................................................................3-24

3.12.1 Example Description..........................................................................................................................3-253.12.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit End.....................................................................3-263.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.............................................................................................3-283.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.......................................................................3-303.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM.......................................................................................3-333.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)........................................................3-353.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)..........................................................3-383.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)..........................................................3-423.12.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)........................................3-45

ContentsOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 5: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System.....................3-483.13.1 Description of the Example................................................................................................................3-493.13.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit End.....................................................................3-553.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.............................................................................................3-583.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End.......................................................................3-60

4 Commissioning Network.........................................................................................................4-14.1 Checking Network-Wide Software Version....................................................................................................4-24.2 Testing Protection Switching..........................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 Testing the Optical Line Protection Switching......................................................................................4-44.2.2 Testing the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection Switching................................................................................4-64.2.3 Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching...............................................................................................4-74.2.4 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching...............................................................................................4-94.2.5 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection Switching.........................................................................................4-114.2.6 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection Switching........................................................................................4-144.2.7 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection Switching....................................................................................4-164.2.8 Testing Board-Level Protection Switching..........................................................................................4-184.2.9 Testing the Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching........................4-204.2.10 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching...........................................................................4-254.2.11 Testing DLAG Protection Switching.................................................................................................4-284.2.12 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection Switching....................................................................................4-304.2.13 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection Switching................................................................4-32

4.3 Testing System Features................................................................................................................................4-344.3.1 Testing IPA..........................................................................................................................................4-354.3.2 Testing ALC.........................................................................................................................................4-364.3.3 Testing APE.........................................................................................................................................4-374.3.4 Testing EAPE.......................................................................................................................................4-39

4.4 Testing Bit Errors..........................................................................................................................................4-414.4.1 Testing the 10-Minute Bit Errors of Each Optical Channel.................................................................4-414.4.2 Testing All-Channel Bit Errors............................................................................................................4-42

4.5 Testing Orderwire Functions.........................................................................................................................4-444.6 Backing Up NE Database..............................................................................................................................4-44

A Commissioning CRPC Board................................................................................................A-1

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1

C Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................C-1

Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide Contents

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

iii

Page 6: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 7: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Protective caps recommended............................................................................................................1-3Figure 1-2 Protective caps not recommended......................................................................................................1-4Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap ..............................................................................................................1-6Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800.................................................1-10Figure 2-1 Position of the jumper on the AUX..................................................................................................2-21Figure 2-2 Figure 2-2 Jumper.............................................................................................................................2-21Figure 3-1 Figure 3-1 Networking diagram of Project X ....................................................................................3-4Figure 3-2 Jumpers on the CRPC board.............................................................................................................3-11Figure 3-3 Diagram of networking with MR2+MR2.........................................................................................3-16Figure 3-4 Diagram of networking with ROAM+ROAM.................................................................................3-18Figure 3-5 Diagram of networking with WSD9+WSM9...................................................................................3-19Figure 3-6 Diagram of networking with WSD9+RMU9...................................................................................3-21Figure 3-7 Diagram of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4............................................................................3-23Figure 3-8 Network diagram of Project X .........................................................................................................3-26Figure 3-9 Fiber connection of OTM station A.................................................................................................3-27Figure 3-10 Fiber connection of OLA station B................................................................................................3-29Figure 3-11 Fiber connection of OTM station C................................................................................................3-31Figure 3-12 Fiber connection of FOADM station E..........................................................................................3-33Figure 3-13 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)...............................................3-36Figure 3-14 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)..................................3-39Figure 3-15 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+RMU9)...................................3-42Figure 3-16 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)............................3-46Figure 3-17 Service requirement matrix in Project H........................................................................................3-49Figure 3-18 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H..................................................................................3-50Figure 3-19 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of Project H....................................................................3-50Figure 3-20 Board_caps Configuration of ONE A and ONE D (OTM)............................................................3-51Figure 3-21 Board_caps Configuration of ONEs B and C (OLA).....................................................................3-52Figure 3-22 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals ..............................................................3-54Figure 3-23 Fiber connection diagram of OTM station A ................................................................................3-56Figure 3-24 Fiber connection diagram of OLA station B .................................................................................3-59Figure 3-25 Fiber connection diagram of OTM station D.................................................................................3-61Figure 4-1 Testing the optical line protection......................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-2 Testing intra-board 1+1 protection switching....................................................................................4-6

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide Figures

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

v

Page 8: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-3 Testing the client 1+1 protection........................................................................................................4-8Figure 4-4 Testing the SW SNCP......................................................................................................................4-10Figure 4-5 Testing ODUk SNCP protection switching......................................................................................4-12Figure 4-6 Testing VLAN SNCP protection switching ....................................................................................4-15Figure 4-7 Testing tributary SNCP protection switching...................................................................................4-17Figure 4-8 Connection for testing the board-level protection switching............................................................4-19Figure 4-9 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal).......................................................................................4-22Figure 4-10 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching).................................................................................4-23Figure 4-11 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal).....................................................................................4-26Figure 4-12 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching).................................................................................4-27Figure 4-13 DLAG protection (normal).............................................................................................................4-29Figure 4-14 DLAG protection (switching).........................................................................................................4-29Figure 4-15 Testing ODUk SPRing protection switching..................................................................................4-31Figure 4-16 Testing optical wavelength shared protection switching................................................................4-33Figure 4-17 IPA verification diagram................................................................................................................4-35Figure 4-18 ALC verification diagram...............................................................................................................4-37Figure 4-19 The APE function test configuration diagram................................................................................4-38Figure 4-20 EAPE verification diagram.............................................................................................................4-40Figure 4-21 Network diagram of Project G........................................................................................................4-41Figure 4-22 Testing bit errors of one channel....................................................................................................4-42Figure 4-23 Fiber connection of all-channel bit error test..................................................................................4-43

FiguresOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 9: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Tables

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment........................................................................................................1-2Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirement of the CRPC.........................................................................................1-5Table 1-3 Instruments and tools...........................................................................................................................1-7Table 1-4 Function Description of the testing connection points.......................................................................1-10Table 1-5 Function description of the testing buttons........................................................................................1-11Table 1-6 Commissioning items.........................................................................................................................1-12Table 3-1 Commissioning stations reference list...............................................................................................3-54Table A-1 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump of different fibers..........................................A-3

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide Tables

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

vii

Page 10: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 11: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides guides to practice the commissioning and testing operations afterhardware installation. It describes the preparations, methods and procedures for the stationcommissioning and network commissioning.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004

OptiX iManager T2000 V200R007C01

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Commissioning engineer

OrganizationThis document is OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform CommissioningGuide. It is organized as follows.

Chapter Describes

1 Preparations forCommissioning

The preparations for commissioning the OptiX OSN 6800.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1

Page 12: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Chapter Describes

2 Configuring NE and Network This chapter describes the methods to creating the networkconnection and setting the NE ID and IP.

3 Commissioning OpticalPower

The consequence, requirements and detailed instruction ofoptical power commissioning.

4 Commissioning Network Network commissioning items and provides the detailedprocedures.

Appendix A CommissioningCRPC Board

The procedure of CRPC commissioning.

Appendix B Glossary The terms that are used in this document.

Appendix C Acronyms andAbbreviations

The acronyms and abbreviations that are used in thisdocument.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, ifnot avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save youtime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General ConventionsConvention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 13: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Convention Description

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in Italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] areoptional.

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can beselected.

GUI ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard OperationFormat Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+Ameans the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3

Page 14: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Format Description

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt,A means thetwo keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse OperationAction Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Based on Product Version V100R004The seventh commercial release has the following updates:l Chapter 3 Commissioning Optical Power

"Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-WavelengthSystem" is added.

l Chapter 3 Commissioning Optical Power"Basic Commissioning Operation" is deleted.

l Chapter 4 Network Commissioning"Testing the Tributary SNCP Protection Switching" is added."Testing the Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection Switching" isadded."Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection Switching" is added."Testing DLAG Protection Switching" is added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-03-08) Based on Product Version V100R003The seventh commercial release has the following updates:l Chapter 4 Network Commissioning

"Testing Client 1+1 Protection Switching" is added."Testing SW SNCP protection Switching" is added."Testing ODUk SNCP protection Switching" is added.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 15: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

"Testing VLAN SNCP protection Switching" is added."Testing Board_Level protection Switching" is added."Testing ODUk SPRing protection Switching" is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R003The sixth commercial release has the following updates:l Chapter 3 Optical Power Commissioning

Commissioning network with WSMD4 is added.MON specifacation of ITL is added.

l Chapter 4 Network Commissioning"Testing OWSP Protection Switching" is added."Testing EAPE" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-12-25) Based on Product Version V100R002The sixth commercial release has the following updates:l Some bug is fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-08-20) Based on Product Version V100R002The fifth commercial release has the following updates:l Chapter 4 Network Commissioning

"Testing Orderwire Function" is added.

Updates in Issue 04 (2007-08-20) Based on Product Version V100R001The forth commercial release has the following updates:l Chapter 4 Network Commissioning

"Testing APE" is added.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-06-29) Based on Product Version V100R001The third commercial release has the following updates:l The structure is adjusted. The Chapter 2 "Configuring NE and Network" is added.

l The Appendix A "Commissioning CRPC Board" is added.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-04-18) Based on Product Version V100R001The second commercial release has the following updates:l The structure is adjusted.

l The Chapter "NE Commissioning" is deleted.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-02-14) Based on Product Version V100R001The first commercial release of the OptiX OSN 6800V100R001.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide About This Document

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

5

Page 16: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 17: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1 Preparations for Commissioning

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to prepare for the OptiX OSN 6800 commissioning.

1.1 Safety Operation GuideThis section describes the safety operation guide. It contains the personal safety regulations andequipment operating regulations. These regulations must be strictly followed to avoid personalinjury and damage to equipment during operation.

1.2 Instruments and ToolsThis section describes the tools and testers that are used in the equipment commissioning.

1.3 Reference DocumentsThis section describes the required reference documents during the commissioning process.

1.4 Engineering Design InformationThis section describes the engineering survey document and engineering design document.

1.5 Commissioning Conditions CheckBefore the commissioning of the OptiX OSN 6800, it is required to check the commissioningconditions.

1.6 Requirements of Commissioning EngineersThis section describes the requirements of commissioning engineers.

1.7 Testing Connection PointsThis section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function andconnection types.

1.8 General Commissioning ProceduresThis section describes the general commissioning procedures.

1.9 List of Commissioning ItemsThis section lists the commissioning items in details.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-1

Page 18: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1.1 Safety Operation GuideThis section describes the safety operation guide. It contains the personal safety regulations andequipment operating regulations. These regulations must be strictly followed to avoid personalinjury and damage to equipment during operation.

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety SymbolsWhen you install and maintain equipment, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm andsafety symbols to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.

1.1.2 Safe Usage of FibersThis section describes the safe usage of fibers.

1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power onThis section describes the requirements when performing operations on the equipment withpower on.

1.1.4 ESDWhen you install and maintain equipment, take antistatic measures to prevent equipmentdamage.

1.1.1 Alarm and Safety SymbolsWhen you install and maintain equipment, observe the precautions indicated by the alarm andsafety symbols to prevent personal injury or equipment damage.

Table 1-1 describes the symbols on WDM equipments.

Table 1-1 Symbols on the WDM equipment

Symbol Describes

ESD protection symbol.Indicates a caution that you need to wear an ESDwrist strap or glove to avoid damage caused byelectrostatic discharge to boards.

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Laser level symbol.Indicates the laser level and a warning that laserbeams may cause injuries to eyes.

Grounding symbol.Indicates the position of the grounding point.

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 19: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Symbol Describes

ATTENTION 注意

CLEAN PERIODICALLY 定期清扫

! Regular cleaning symbol.Indicates a warning that you need to regularlyclean the air filter.

严禁在风扇高速旋转时接触叶片

DON'T TOUCH THEFAN LEAVES BEFORETHEY SLOW DOWN !

Fan warning symbol.Indicates a warning that you cannot touch the fanblade before the fan stops.

1.1.2 Safe Usage of FibersThis section describes the safe usage of fibers.

DANGERThe laser beams of the optical interface board or inside the optical fiber might cause damage tothe eyes. Do not expose the eyes to the laser beams.

Protection of Optical ConnectorsAll idle optical connectors of fiber jump and optical interfaces on optical interface boards mustbe covered with protective caps. The optical interfaces of the replaced boards must be coveredwith protective caps in time. Store them in proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean.

Protective caps recommended are shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Protective caps recommended

Protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 1-2.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-3

Page 20: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 1-2 Protective caps not recommended

NOTE

The protective caps that are not recommended are made of soft rubber. The caps tend to collect dust andsundries. It is hard to clean this type of caps and the caps give no perfect dust proof effect.

Connecting Fibers

CAUTIONWhen using fiber jumper to perform a hardware loopback test on optical interfaces, increase theattenuation to avoid damage to equipment due to high power of laser beam. For the boards whereoptical attenuators can be added, add optical attenuators on the receive optical interface, but noton the transmit optical interface.

Insert the fibers into the optical connectors carefully when connecting fibers. If the optical poweris too high, add a fixed optical attenuator to avoid damage to optical interfaces due to the highinput optical power.

DANGERBefore removing or inserting fibers from/into the CRPC board, shut down the pump laser toavoid damage to human body due to the high optical power from the laser. The laser class of theCRPC board is CLASS 4. The maximum output optical power of the optical interface on theboard is more than 27 dBm (500 mW).

The CRPC board raises high requirements on fiber loss of the line nearby. For details, refer toTable 1-2.

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 21: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Table 1-2 Fiber connection requirement of the CRPC

Distance Loss (dB) Connector (piece)

0–10 (km) ≤0.1 0

10–20 (km) ≤0.2 0

NOTE

For CRPC board, only the ODF has one terminal. Other connection points adopt the fiber splicing form.

For details on how to connect fiber connectors, refer to the Installation Guide..

Cleaning Fibers

The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of lasers must be cleaned by using special cleaningtools and materials. The following are some common cleaning tools:

l Cleaning solvent

l Non-woven lens tissue

l Special compressed gas

l Dust-free cotton stick

l Special cleaning roll, using with cleaning solvent listed in the first item

l Fiberscope

For details on how to clean fibers, refer to the Troubleshooting.

1.1.3 Operations on the Equipment with Power onThis section describes the requirements when performing operations on the equipment withpower on.

Note the following requirements when performing operations on the equipment with power on.

l Do not install or disassemble the equipment with power on.

l Do not install or remove power cables with power on.

l Before connecting cables, ensure that the cable and cable label are consistent with the actualrequirement.

1.1.4 ESDWhen you install and maintain equipment, take antistatic measures to prevent equipmentdamage.

The general rules for electrostatic prevention are as follows:

l Check that the equipment is securely grounded.

l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-5

Page 22: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

CAUTIONWear a well-grounded ESD wrist strap whenever you touch any equipment or board. Make surethat the wrist strap fully touches your skin. Insert the connector of the ESD strap into the ESDsocket in the subrack.

For the method of how to wear an ESD wrist strap, refer to Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

When you take antistatic measures, take the following precautions:

l Check the validity and functionality of the wrist strap. Its resistance value must be within0.75 megaohm to 10 megaohm. If the validity period (usually two years) of the wrist strapexpires or the resistance value fails to meet requirements, use a functioning wrist strap.

l Do not touch a board with your clothing. It generates static electricity beyond the protectionscope of the wrist strap.

l Wear an ESD wrist strap and place the board on an antistatic pad when you replaceboard software or chips. Use antistatic tweezers or extraction tools to replace chips. Do nottouch chips, circuits, or pins with your bare hands.

l Keep the boards and other ESD sensitive parts to be installed in antistatic bags. Place theremoved boards and components on an antistatic pad or other antistatic materials. Do notuse non-antistatic materials such as white foams, common plastic bags, or paper bags topack boards or let them touch boards.

l Wear an ESD wrist strap when operating the ports of boards because they are also ESD-sensitive. Discharge the static electricity of cables and protective sleeves before you connectthem to the ports.

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 23: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l Reserve some materials for board installation (such as antistatic boxes and bags) in theroom for future use.

1.2 Instruments and ToolsThis section describes the tools and testers that are used in the equipment commissioning.

Table 1-3 lists the tools and testers that are used in the equipment commissioning.

Table 1-3 Instruments and tools

Tool or Tester Usage

Optical power meter Used to test the actual received optical power, the receiversensitivity and the receiver overload at optical interfaces.Mainly used to test the optical power on the client side and theWDM side of the OTU, and the general optical power of themultiplexed signals.

Laptop Used to install the T2000 LCTduring the network element (NE)commissioning.

Multimeter Used to test the voltage, resistance, and current intensity duringthe power test.

Fiber microscope Used for checking the cleanness of the endface of the fiber.

Fiber jumper Used for connections during the optical power test of opticalinterfaces at the optical distribution frame (ODF) side.

Cassette cleaner or lenstissue

It is used to clean the end faces of fibers.

Flange It is used to transfer the fiber jumper.

Fixed optical attenuator Used to weaken the strong light received by an optical module.

Variable optical attenuator(VOA)

Used to weaken the strong light received by an optical moduleand test the receiver sensitivity and the receiver overload.

Optical spectrum analyzer It is mainly used to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noiseratio (OSNR) and the central wavelength of each wavelength inthe multiplexed signals.

SDH analyzer Used in the network commissioning and the index test of SDHservice.

GE tester Used in the GE service index test.

10GE tester Used in the 10GE service index test.

ESCON tester Used in the ESCON service index test.

FICON/FC tester Used in the FICON service and FC service index test.

Cross screwdriver It is used to install or uninstall the board screws.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-7

Page 24: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Tool or Tester Usage

Special compressed gas It is used to clean the optical interfaces of boards.

NOTE

The optical power of single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be test with an optical spectrumanalyzer. The commissioning method is more accurate and does not need to consider the influence of noise.

Align the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to test the optical power. The method toverify the alignment is as follows.

Test the optical power of the OUT optical interface on the OTU with an optical spectrum analyzerand compare the value with the value tested by an optical power meter. If the difference is lessthan 0.5 dB, the alignment is acceptable. If not, align the optical spectrum analyzer again.

1.3 Reference DocumentsThis section describes the required reference documents during the commissioning process.

The following reference documents are required for equipment commissioning:

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Product Description

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Planning Guidelines

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Hardware Description

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Installation Guide

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Configuration Guide

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform/OptiX OSN 3800 CompactIntelligent Optical Transport Platform Feature Description

l OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform Web LCT Operation Guide

1.4 Engineering Design InformationThis section describes the engineering survey document and engineering design document.

1.4.1 Engineering Survey DocumentThis section describes the required engineering survey documents.

1.4.2 Engineering Design DocumentThis section describes the required engineering design documents during equipmentcommissioning.

1.4.1 Engineering Survey DocumentThis section describes the required engineering survey documents.

The required engineering survey documents include the survey report and survey guide.

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 25: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1.4.2 Engineering Design DocumentThis section describes the required engineering design documents during equipmentcommissioning.

The required engineering design documents during equipment commissioning are listed below:

l Network diagram (including networking diagram of the entire network, basic topologiesdiagram and network management diagram)

l Board layout diagram of the cabinet

l Wavelength allocation table

l Cabinet fiber connection diagram

l Configuration diagram of optical amplifiers

l Fiber connection diagram

l Optical attenuator list

l Design description file

1.5 Commissioning Conditions CheckBefore the commissioning of the OptiX OSN 6800, it is required to check the commissioningconditions.

For the details of commissioning conditions check, refer to Installation Guide.

1.6 Requirements of Commissioning EngineersThis section describes the requirements of commissioning engineers.

Commissioning engineers must have received professional training on optical networkcommissioning and are skilled at using the tools.

The commissioning engineer must be familiar with:

l WDM, SDH, and Ethernet theories

l The OptiX OSN 6800 equipment

l The T2000, and service configuration with the T2000

l The testers (WDM, SDH and Ethernet)

1.7 Testing Connection PointsThis section describes the types of connection points, including the corresponding function andconnection types.

Figure 1-4 shows the testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800. For thefunction description of the testing connection points and the buttons, refer to the Table 1-4 andTable 1-5.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-9

Page 26: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 1-4 Testing connection points on the subrack of the OptiX OSN 6800

Table 1-4 Function Description of the testing connection points

Interface Silk-Screen

Function Description ConnectionType

COM Commissioning interface, used forcommunications between the EFI and AUX boards

RJ-45

ALMO1ALMO2ALMO3ALMO4

Generally the alarm output is sent to the centralizedalarm and power distribution cabinet by outputinterfaces and cascading interfaces. Or othermodes can be configured to send the alarm outputfor assembly displaying the alarm. The OptiX OSN6800 provides eight channels of alarm output. Theformer three by default are critical alarm, majoralarm and minor alarm. The other five channels arereserved for alarm output cascading.

RJ-45

SERIAL OAM interface, that is serial network management(NM) interfaces, which supports X.25 protocol.When the interface is served as COA managementinterface, it can manage the COA, TDA, DCU andother external equipments. The rate of serialinterface is 9.6kbit/s.

DB9

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 27: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Interface Silk-Screen

Function Description ConnectionType

ALMI1ALMI2

The external alarm input function is designed forexternal system whose alarms need remotemonitoring (for example, environment monitoringsystem). The names of the eight channels of alarmscan be set to realize the remote monitoring of theexternal alarms with the external system.

RJ-45

LAMP1LAMP2

Used to drive the running indicators and alarmindicators of the cabinet where the subrack ishoused.

RJ-45

NM_ETH1NM_ETH2

Connects the network interface on the OptiX OSN6800 through a network cable to that on the T2000server to achieve the management of the T2000over the OptiX OSN 6800.Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 networkinterface on one NE through a network cable to thaton another NE to achieve communication betweenNEs.

RJ-45

ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 Connects the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on onesubrack through a network cable to such interfaceson the other subrack to achieve the communicationbetween the master subrack and the slave subracks.

RJ-45

Table 1-5 Function description of the testing buttons

Interface Silk-Screen Function Description

RST RESET button, used to reset the SCC board

ALM CUT Trigger switch, used to mute the alarm of the subrack. Transientlypress the button to mute the prompt of current alarm. Press thebutton for five seconds to mute the alarm.

LAMP TEST Used to test the indicators. After you press down the button, allindicators are lit.

1.8 General Commissioning ProceduresThis section describes the general commissioning procedures.

The commissioning procedures of the OptiX WDM can be divided into two parts: optical powercommissioning, and network commissioning.

l Optical power commissioning is to commission the optical power values of NEs and boardsone by one according to the optical signal flow, and to remove the abnormal attenuation of

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 1 Preparations for Commissioning

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

1-11

Page 28: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

lines or boards according to the requirements on optical power, gain and insertion loss ofthe boards.

l Network commissioning includes commissioning protection function, testing bit errors andother function commissioning operations of network level.

After optical power commissioning of all NEs is complete, start the network commissioning ofthe product in the central T2000 station.

1.9 List of Commissioning ItemsThis section lists the commissioning items in details.

Table 1-6 lists the commissioning items.

Table 1-6 Commissioning items

No. Item

1 Checking the connection of the T2000 server

2 Setting the NE ID and IP

3 Checking master/slave subracks

4 Setting manual extended ECC communication

5 Creating and configuring the network

6 Commissioning the optical power of each board

7 Checking the network-wide software version

8 Testing protection switching

9 Testing orderwire

10 Testing system features

11 Testing bit errors

12 Backing up NE databases

1 Preparations for CommissioningOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

1-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 29: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2 Configuring NE and Network

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to configure NE and network.

2.1 Connecting the NM ComputerThis section describes how to connect the NM computer to an NE, so that the NM can managethe NE.

2.2 Starting the T2000This section describes how to start the T2000 server and the client.

2.3 Creating an Optical Network Element (ONE)Use this procedure to create an optical NE (ONE) manually. On the T2000, the WDM equipmentis managed as an ONE.

2.4 Creating an NEThis section describes the two methods of creating a NE: creating NEs in batches by using thesearching function and creating NEs one by one manually.

2.5 Logging In to an NEOn the T2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

2.6 Setting NE ID and IPECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word of indexon the T2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign aunique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if youneed to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on theT2000.

2.7 Creating BoardsYou can add a certain board manually on the T2000. After the board is added, you can addcustomized information into the remarks of the board to facilitate the future maintenance andtroubleshooting.

2.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface AttributesConfigure the WDM interface attributes of boards to meet the engineering requirements. Everyboard has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interfaceparameters can be queried.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-1

Page 30: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.9 Synchronizing NE Time with the T2000 Server ManuallyFor NEs without the NTP service configured, to enable the T2000 to record the alarm andperformance events occurring time correctly, you are suggested to check whether the NE timeis consistent with the T2000 server time or not during routine maintenance. If not, synchronizethe NE time with the T2000 server manually.

2.10 Starting or Stopping Performance Monitoring of the Specified NEPerformance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the operation of an NE, helping themaintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the operation status of the NE. Use this procedureto start or stop performance monitoring.

2.11 Setting Master/Slave SubracksThe OptiX OSN 6800 supports the master/slave subrack management. The ID of the master orslave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack. To prevent subrack ID conflict andavoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly.

2.12 Setting Manually Extended ECC CommunicationWhen there is no optical path between two or more NEs for communication, the Ethernet portof the SCC can be used to realize the extended ECC communication. If the number of NEsexceeds four, the manually extended ECC communication is recommended. During setting ofthe manually extended ECC communication, set one or more NEs to the server and other NEsto the client.

2.13 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic ModeIn graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flowdiagram directly. This mode is applicable to scenarios where a small number of fiber connectionsare to be created one by one.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 31: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.1 Connecting the NM ComputerThis section describes how to connect the NM computer to an NE, so that the NM can managethe NE.

2.1.1 Connecting the T2000 Server DirectlyThis section describes how to connect the T2000 server to ETHERNET interface in the subrackby using a cable.

2.1.2 Connecting the T2000 Server Through a LANThis section describes how to connect the T2000 server to the NE through a LAN.

2.1.1 Connecting the T2000 Server DirectlyThis section describes how to connect the T2000 server to ETHERNET interface in the subrackby using a cable.

Prerequisite

The IP addresses of the NE and the LAN must be in the same network segment.

The IE agent must be removed.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Computer, network cable

Precautions

None

Procedure

Step 1 Check the cable. One end of the cable should be connected to the network interface of the NMcomputer. And the other end should be connected to the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of theAUX board.

Step 2 Check whether the indicator of the network card interface of the NM computer is constantly on.

Step 3 Check the indicators of the equipment. The indicator of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface ofthe AUX board and the green "LINK" indicator should be constantly on. The orange "ACT"indicator should flash.

Step 4 Click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start Menu, and the Control Panel window isdisplayed.

Step 5 Select Network Connection, and the Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 6 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. The Local Area ConnectionProperties window is displayed.

Step 7 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)window is displayed.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-3

Page 32: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 8 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP addressthat is in the same network segment with that of the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is aninteger from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address cannot be the same as any of the existing IPaddresses.

Step 9 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

CAUTIONWhen configuring the Use the following IP address check box in direct connection, do notconfigure the gateway lest the configured gateway lead to the failure of connection. If the T2000server has more than one network cards, choose the corresponding local connection of thenetwork card connected to the subrack.

Step 10 Click OK.

----End

2.1.2 Connecting the T2000 Server Through a LANThis section describes how to connect the T2000 server to the NE through a LAN.

PrerequisiteWhen the T2000 server connects to the NE through a LAN, set the IP address in a similar wayas described in the previous section. Note the following requirements:

l The IP addresses of the NE and the LAN must be in the same network segment.

l The NE must connect to a HUB, router or Ethernet switch through straight-through cables.

l The IE agent must be removed.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

PrecautionsNone

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the computer into the LAN.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 33: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 2 Check the cable. The NM computer is connected to the LAN by cables. And the equipment isconnected to the LAN through the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface of the AUX board by cables.

Step 3 Check whether the indicator of the network card interface of the NM computer is constantly on.

Step 4 Check the indicators of the equipment. The indicator of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface ofthe AUX board and the green "LINK" indicator should be constantly on. The orange "ACT"indicator should flash.

Step 5 Click Start. Select Control Panel from the Start Menu, and the Control Panel window isdisplayed.

Step 6 Select Network Connection, and the Network Connection window is displayed.

Step 7 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. The Local Area ConnectionProperties window is displayed.

Step 8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)window is displayed.

Step 9 Check the Use the following IP address check box. In the IP address field, enter an IP addressthat is in the same network segment with that of the NE, for example, 129.9.0.N, where N is aninteger from 1 to 255. Note that the IP address cannot be the same as any of the existing IPaddresses.

Step 10 In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.0.0.

CAUTIONWhen configuring the Use the following IP address check box in direct connection, do notconfigure the gateway lest the configured gateway lead to the failure of connection. If the T2000server has more than one network cards, choose the corresponding local connection of thenetwork card connected to the subrack.

Step 11 Click OK.

----End

2.2 Starting the T2000This section describes how to start the T2000 server and the client.

2.2.1 Starting the T2000 ServerAfter starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to theT2000 to manage the network.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-5

Page 34: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.2.2 Logging In to the T2000 ClientYou can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to theT2000 client.

2.2.1 Starting the T2000 ServerAfter starting the computer, you need to start the T2000 server. Then you can log in to theT2000 to manage the network.

Prerequisitel The computer where the T2000 is installed must be started correctly.l The operating system of the T2000 server must be running correctly.l The T2000 license must be in the server directory.l The SQL Server must be started and work normally.

ProcedureStep 1 Double-click the T2000Server icon on the desktop of the T2000 server.

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, enter User Name, Password and Server. For example, User Name:admin, Password: T2000 (T2000 is the default password of the admin user.) and Server:Local.

NOTE

Periodically change the password and memorize it.

Step 3 Click Login. Wait until the database process, T2000 core process, and the processes that areoptional according to the actual situation are in the Running state. Now the T2000 server isstarted successfully.

Step 4 Optional: When needed, you can also start the Extended NE Management Process, NGWDMNE Management Process, RTN NE Management Process, SDH NE ManagementProcess, WDM NE Management Process, ASON SDH Management Process, ASON WDMManagement Process, End-to-End Common Management Process, End-to-End EthManagement Process, End-to-End OTN Management Process, End-to-End SDHManagement Process, and Northbound Interface Module(SNMP) Process processesmanually.

NOTE

If the System Monitor application is started, you can restart the T2000 server on the System Monitor.Perform the following step:Choose System > Start Server on the Main Menu of the System Monitor. Wait until the database process,T2000 core process, and the processes that are optional according to the actual situation are in theRunning state, the T2000 server is started properly.

----End

2.2.2 Logging In to the T2000 ClientYou can manage the network in the graphic user interface (GUI) only after logging in to theT2000 client.

PrerequisiteThe T2000 server must be started correctly.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 35: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Background InformationWhen the T2000 server and the T2000 client are not on a computer, you need to install the clienton the computer where the server resides. Set ACL on the client and then issue the ACL settingto the server.l On the T2000 client, choose System > NMS Security Settings > ACL from the Main

Menu.l Click Add. In the dialog box displayed, enter related information.

– Select IP Address or Segment and set an IP address or network section that can beaccessed according to the Example of format.

– Select Start IP address to end IP address and set the rang of IP addresses that can beaccessed according to the Example of format.

ProcedureStep 1 On the computer of the T2000 client, double-click the T2000Client icon on the desktop.

Step 2 Enter the User Name, Password of the T2000 client. For example, User Name: admin;Password: T2000.

NOTE

l After the automatic login is selected, you do not need to enter the user name and password.

l By default, the initial user name is admin, and the password is T2000. To protect the T2000 fromunauthorized logins, you need to immediately change this password.

l The administrator needs to create new T2000 users and assign them to certain authority groups.

Step 3 Optional: Set the server parameters.

1. Click to display the Server Setting dialog box.2. Click New to display another Add Server dialog box.3. In the Add Server dialog box, specify the IP Address, Mode and Server Name.

NOTE

l The IP address is the IP address used by the T2000 server.

l The Mode has two options including Common and Security (SSL). When you choose theSecurity (SSL) mode, the communication between the client and the server is encrypted.

l The communication mode of the client must be consistent with that of the server. Otherwise, theclient cannot log in to the server. To view the communication mode of the server, chooseSystem > Communication Mode Settings on the Main Menu of the System Monitor.

l You need not enter the Port number. After the Mode is specified, the system selects a Portnumber automatically.

4. Click OK to complete adding a server.5. Click OK to complete the server settings.

Step 4 Select a server and click Login to access the T2000.

----End

2.3 Creating an Optical Network Element (ONE)Use this procedure to create an optical NE (ONE) manually. On the T2000, the WDM equipmentis managed as an ONE.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-7

Page 36: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Background InformationThe T2000 manages the WDM equipment as an ONE. The optical NE has threetypes:WDM_OTM、WDM_OLA and WDM_OADM.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose Create > Device.

Step 2 Select the optical NE type for the optical NE in the Add Object dialog box.

Step 3 In the right-hand pane, click the General Attributes tab. Type in the name of the ONE. Forother fields, adopt the default values.

Step 4 Click the Resource Division tab. Select the created NEs from the Available Boards pane, and

add them to the Selected Boards pane by clicking .

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 37: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 5 Click OK, the cursor changes to a "+".

NOTE

l If you click OK in Step 5, the Main Topology is displayed.

l If you click Apply in Step 5, the Create Topology Object dialog box is displayed after Step 6.

Step 6 Click on the Main Topology. The icon of this NE appears on where you click.

NOTE

If you click OK in Step 5, the Main Topology is displayed.If you click Apply in Step 5, the Add Object dialog box is displayed after Step 6.

----End

2.4 Creating an NEThis section describes the two methods of creating a NE: creating NEs in batches by using thesearching function and creating NEs one by one manually.

Background InformationThe OptiX OSN 6800 supports master-slave subrack mode. The slave subracks do not need theindependentNEID andNEIP. When you create the NE, create the master subrack only. The slavesubracks attached with the master subrack can be automatically identified through the mastersubrack. They need not be configured independently.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-9

Page 38: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.4.1 Searching to Create NEsWhen the T2000 communicates with the GNE properly, you can create NEs in batch by searchingfor all NEs that communicate with the GNE, through the IP address of the GNE or the networksegment the IP address is associated to or the NSAP address of the NE. This method is quickerand more accurate than manual creation.

2.4.2 Creating an NE ManuallyOn the T2000, all equipment is managed in units of NEs. You can create a single NE manually.

2.4.1 Searching to Create NEsWhen the T2000 communicates with the GNE properly, you can create NEs in batch by searchingfor all NEs that communicate with the GNE, through the IP address of the GNE or the networksegment the IP address is associated to or the NSAP address of the NE. This method is quickerand more accurate than manual creation.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE administrator" authority or higher.

The T2000 must communicate with the GNE properly.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Search for NE from the Main Menu.

Step 2 Click Add and the Input Search Domain dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set Address type to IP Address Range of GNE, IP Address of GNE or NSAP Address, andenter the Search Address, User name and Password. Click OK.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 39: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

You can repeat steps 2 through 3 to add multiple search fields. You can delete the system default searchfield.

l If you use IP address to search for NEs, and the IP address of the T2000 computer and that of the GNEare within the same network segment, you can select IP Address Range of GNE or IP Address ofGNE.

l If the IP addresses are not within the same network segment, you can only select IP Address ofGNE.

l If you use NSAP address of OSI protocol to search for NEs, you can only select NSAP address.

l The initial User Name is root and the Password is password.

Step 4 Click Start.

Step 5 After the search is ended, select the uncreated NEs in the Result list and click Create. TheCreate dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Enter the NE user name and password.

NOTE

l Default user name: root

l Default password: password

Step 7 Click OK. The NE is allocated to the Idle ONE.

NOTE

For details on how the NE created through searching is allocated to the specified ONE, refer to 2.3 Creatingan Optical Network Element (ONE).

----End

2.4.2 Creating an NE ManuallyOn the T2000, all equipment is managed in units of NEs. You can create a single NE manually.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click on the Main Topology and choose Create > Device... . The Add Object dialogbox is displayed.

Step 2 Choose Object Type > NE > NG WDM Series > OptiX OSN 6800 。

Step 3 Enter the attribute values of the NE.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-11

Page 40: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

l Default user name: root

l Default password: password

NOTE

When the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, set Affiliated Gateway to the gateway NE of the subnet.

Step 4 Click OK. The Operation succeed dialog box is displayed, indicating the NE is createdsuccessfully. Then click Cancel and finish creating the NE.

NOTE

For WDM NEs, the Operation succeeded dialog box is displayed and indicates that the operationsucceeded. Click Open to provision the boards on the subrack, or click Cancel to finish the operation. Fordetails on how to create the boards, refer to Configuring an NE Manually.

----End

2.5 Logging In to an NEOn the T2000, a user can operate an NE only after the user logs in to the NE.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 41: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

PrerequisiteThe NE must be created and the NE must be working normally.

The user must log in to the T2000.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Background InformationOn the T2000, a user can see an NE only when the user has the authority to log in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the desired ONE icon in the Main Topology to display the NE Panel of the ONE.

Step 2 Right-click the desired NE and choose Login from the displayed menu. Click Close on theOperation Result dialog box.

----End

2.6 Setting NE ID and IPECC protocol recognizes NE through the NE ID. NE ID is also used as the key word of indexon the T2000 interface and database. Therefore, when planning the network, you must assign aunique ID for each NE. If an NE ID conflicts with another one, ECC routing collision is caused.In this case, some NEs cannot be managed. In the commissioning or expansion process, if youneed to change the NE ID because of planning adjustment, you can change the NE ID on theT2000.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with NE and network operator authority or higher.

The ECC GNE or ECC non-gateway NE must be created.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Background InformationThe master and slave subracks are displayed as one NE on the T2000. They share one NE IDand one NE IP.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-13

Page 42: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Precautions

CAUTIONl Modifying the NE ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt NE communication.

l Before modifying the NE ID, delete the service and function connected with the NE ID,for example, the protection group, IPA, ALC, fiber connection and so on. After modifyingthe NE ID, reconnect the fiber connection and re-configure the protection group, IPA, ALCand other function connected with NE ID.

Procedurel For Non-Gateway NEs

1. Log in T2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.2. In the NE Explorer, select an NE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from

the Function Tree.3. Click the Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the

New Extended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.4. Create an NE and set the same equipment type for the new NE as the one for the

original NE. Set the ID and Extended ID of the new NE to the modified ID andextended ID of the original NE.

NOTE

l For details to create an NE, refer to Configuration Guide..

l Before you create an NE, you need to wait until the SCC board of the original NE resets,that is, until the NE icon turns gray.

5. Double-click the new NE and select Copy NE Data in the NE ConfigurationWizarddialog box. Click Next.

6. In the NE Replicationdialog box, select the original NE you want to replicate. ClickStart. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box that appears twice. Click Close in theOperation Resultdialog box.

7. Delete the fibers from the original NE.8. Right-click the original NE and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Click OK in

the Delete NEdialog box.

CAUTIONFor non-gateway NEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between thisNE and other NEs.

l For Gateway NEs1. Log in T2000, delete the NE service configuration and the NE fiber connection.2. In the NE Explorer, select the GNE and choose Configuration > NE Attribute from

the Function Tree.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 43: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3. Click Modify NE ID. In the Modify NE ID window, enter the New ID and the NewExtended ID. Click OK. Click OK in the Warning dialog box.

4. In the Main Topology, right-click the GNE and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.Click OK in the Delete NE dialog box.

NOTEBefore you delete an NE, you need to wait until the SCC board of the original NE resets, thatis, until the NE icon turns gray.

5. In the Main Topology, click File > Search for NE.

6. Click Start. After searching, Click Stop.

7. Select the modifying NE,click Create.

8. Back to the Main Topology, right-click the original NE, and choose Attribute。

9. Select Resource Division,select the new NE, click , click OK.

10. In the Main Topology, double-click the new NE and choose Upload in the NEConfiguration Wizard dialog box.

11. Click Next. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. The Upload window is displayedshowing the progress of uploading.

12. After the uploading is complete, click Close in the Operation Result dialog box.

CAUTIONFor GNEs, after you set the NE ID, you need to re-create fibers between this NE and otherNEs. Also, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gateway NEs that are originallyconnected to the GNE.

l Setting NEs IP

1. In the NE Explorer, select a NE and choose Communication > CommunicationParameters from the Function Tree.

2. Set the communication parameters of the NE, including IP, extended IP, gateway IPand subnet mask.

3. Click Apply. Click OK in the two displayed Warning dialog boxes. Then clickClose in the displayed Operation Result dialog box.

CAUTIONAfter you change the IP address, the communication of the NE is interrupted. Hence, youneed to create a new NE. For details, see Steps 3 to 12 in "Setting the Gateway NE ID."

For GNEs, after you set the NE IP, you need to specify the active GNE for non-gatewayNEs that are originally connected to the GNE.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-15

Page 44: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.7 Creating BoardsYou can add a certain board manually on the T2000. After the board is added, you can addcustomized information into the remarks of the board to facilitate the future maintenance andtroubleshooting.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

The NE must be created successfully. The NE must be in running state.

ProcedureStep 1 Double-click the ONE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed.

Step 2 Select the desired NE from the left-side NE list. Right-click the slot that is to be configured witha board. Select a proper board from the displayed board list.

Step 3 Optional: Right-click the added board and select Remark. A Modify Remark dialog box isdisplayed.

NOTE

Enter information such as service type and circuit number into Remark to facilitate the future maintenanceand troubleshooting.

Step 4 Optional: Enter the related information in Remark in the Modify Remark dialog box.

Step 5 Optional: Click OK, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

----End

2.8 Configuring Board WDM Interface AttributesConfigure the WDM interface attributes of boards to meet the engineering requirements. Everyboard has its own specific parameters, but the parameters are set in the same way. All interfaceparameters can be queried.

Background InformationFor details on the parameters, refer to the Hardware Description.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 45: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Procedure

Step 1 Double-click the ONE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed.

Step 2 Right click the NE icon and select NE Explorer.

Step 3 In the NE Explorer, select the desired board and choose Configuration > WDM Interface fromthe Function Tree.

Step 4 Click By Board/Port(Channel). Select Channel or Board from the drop-down list. ClickQuery. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.

NOTE

When By Function is selected, the parameters of boards and channels can be queried and set from theperspective of function.

Step 5 Select Basic Attributes or Advanced Attributes tabs. Double-click corresponding parameterfields and enter or select parameters.

Step 6 Click Apply. A prompt appears to indicate that the operation was successful. Click Close.

----End

Configuration Example: Configuring Tunable WavelengthsNOTE

l OTUs are classified into tunable OTUs and untunable OTUs. Untunable OTUs support setting oftransmitting wavelengths through hardware (such as optical module replacement). Tunable OTUssupport setting of transmitting wavelengths on NMs.

l The NMs provides two parameters: Configuration Wavelength and Actual Wavelength. The ActualWavelength is the currently adopted wavelength of the OTU. The Configuration Wavelength is thereserved wavelength for future plan. For a tunable OTU, you can set the ConfigurationWavelength change its Actual Wavelength. For a untunable OTU, when its ConfigurationWavelength and Actual wavelength are inconsistent, the system reports CFGDATA_OUTRANGEalarm.

Configure the tunable wavelength function of the OTU board based on the actual needs.

The wavelength configuration of the L4G board is taken as an example.

1. Double-click the ONE icon on the Main Topology. The NE Panel tab is displayed.2. Right click the NE icon and select NE Explorer.3. In the NE Explorer, select the board with tunable wavelength function and choose

Configuration > WDM interface in the Function Tree.4. Select By Board/Port(Path). Select Path or Board from the drop-down list. Click

Query. The parameter list of each optical port or channel is listed in the interface.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-17

Page 46: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

5. Select Advanced Attributes tab. Double-click Configuration Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) parameter field. Select the wavelength from thedisplayed drop-down list.

6. Click Apply. A prompt appears to indicate that the operation was successful. ClickClose.

7. Click Query. The wavelengths displayed in the Actual Wavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) field should be consistent with those in the ConfigurationWavelength No./Wavelength(nm)/Frequency(THz) field.

2.9 Synchronizing NE Time with the T2000 Server ManuallyFor NEs without the NTP service configured, to enable the T2000 to record the alarm andperformance events occurring time correctly, you are suggested to check whether the NE timeis consistent with the T2000 server time or not during routine maintenance. If not, synchronizethe NE time with the T2000 server manually.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE operator" authority or higher.

The synchronous mode of NE time is set to NM or None.

Background InformationSynchronize the time of each NE with the T2000 before configuring alarm and performanceparameters.

Before synchronizing the NE time, verify that the system time on the T2000 server is correct.If you want to change the system time, exit the T2000 to reset the time and then start the T2000again.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu.

Step 2 All NEs are selected by default on the T2000. Select the NEs in the left pane and click the double-right-arrow button (red).

NOTE

After only the NEs are selected, the double-right-arrow button turns red.

Step 3 In the right-hand NE list, double-click the Synchronous Mode field and select NM for all NEs.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 47: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

l Hold down the left button of the mouse and choose several NEs at a time. Then, right-click to set thesynchronization mode.

l When the NE is selected, right-click in the blank space and choose Synchronize with NM Time inthe shortcut menu, and set the NE to be synchronous with the T2000.

Step 4 Click Apply, and the Operation Result dialog box is displayed. Click Close.

Step 5 Right-click the desired NE and select Synchronize with NM Time.

Step 6 Click Yes in the Time Synchronization Operation dialog box. Click Close in the OperationResult dialog box.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-19

Page 48: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.10 Starting or Stopping Performance Monitoring of theSpecified NE

Performance monitoring keeps a detailed record of the operation of an NE, helping themaintenance engineer to monitor and analyze the operation status of the NE. Use this procedureto start or stop performance monitoring.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

NE time is synchronized with the T2000 server.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, click an NE and choose Performance > NE Performance MonitorTime from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select one NE, and set 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring parameters accordingto the requirements.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

2.11 Setting Master/Slave SubracksThe OptiX OSN 6800 supports the master/slave subrack management. The ID of the master orslave subrack is set through the AUX board in the subrack. To prevent subrack ID conflict andavoid the communication error, set the IDs of the master and slave subracks correctly.

PrerequisiteThe T2000 server and client should be started normally.

The master/slave subracks should be installed.

Fiber connection should be done.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Background InformationThe master subrack and the slave subrack are connected through the ETH1/ETH2 of the AUXor the ETH3 of the EFI. The ID of the master subrack is 0 by default. The AUX board can beused to set the ID of the slave subrack. The setting is realized by jumpers.

The AUX board has three jumpers, which can be used to realize eight states that representdecimal values 0–7.Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. The default value of the threejumpers is 000. Figure 2-1 shows the jumper.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 49: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l The jumpers are numbered 3 to 1 from the side close to CPU.

l The jumpers are numbered 1 to 3 from the most significant bit to the lest significant bit.

l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins arenot placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 1.

l When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents thevalue 0.

In Figure 2-2 the value represented by the three jumpers is 001, which is 1 in decimal system.That is, the subrack ID is 1.

Figure 2-1 Position of the jumper on the AUX.

CPU

jumpers

Figure 2-2 Figure 2-2 Jumper

1 2 3

jumper cap

representing 0 representing 0 representing 1

NOTE

The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed overthe two pins.

The LCD front panel of the SCC indicates the ID of the subrack. The ID of the master subrackis 0 and the ID of the slave subrack ranges from 1 to 7.

On the NMS, the master subrack and the multiple slave subracks are displayed as one NE withone ID and one IP.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-21

Page 50: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Precautions

CAUTIONModifying the NE ID is a dangerous operation, which may interrupt service.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether any ID displayed on the SCCs of the master/slave subracks repeats or blinks. Ifso, there is conflict in subrack ID. Adjust the jumpers of corresponding AUX boards againstrepetition.

NOTEAfter jumper adjustment, the NE or subrack must be reset. For details, refer to Step 4.

Step 2 Log in the T2000.

Step 3 Double-click the optical NE to display the status figure of the ONE.

Step 4 Right-click the NE to display the NE Explorer.1. If there is repetition or blink in master subrack ID in step 1, power-off reset the NE.2. If there is repetition or blink in slave subrack ID in step 1, warm reset all boards in this

slave subrack, or power-off reset the NE.

NOTE

l During deployment commissioning, the reset operation can be realized by reboot of the subrack powersupply. For example, to reset the NE, you can close the power supplies of all master and slave subracks.Reopen the power supplies when all boards stop working.

l To avoid service interruption in upgrade and expansion process, you can warm reset all boards oforiginal subracks and then reboot the power supply of the new-inserted subrack that causes the conflict.

Step 5 In the Main Topology, choose Fault > Browse Current Alarms.

Step 6 In the aviation tree on the left side, choose the NE to be queried. Click .

Step 7 In the status figure of the ONE, right-click the NE to display the Browse Current Alarms.

Step 8 In the view on the right side, check where there is any SUBRACK_LOOP in the current andhistory alarms.1. If there is, check the network cable connection to ensure that the connections between the

master subrack and the slave subracks are chains.2. Warm reset all boards in the master and slave subracks.

Step 9 Check whether there is any SUBRACK_ID_CONFLICT in the current and history alarms.1. If there is, adjust the jumpers of corresponding AUX boards against repetition.2. Refer to step 4 to reset the board.

Step 10 Insert a physical board in the slave subrack and add the corresponding logical board on theT2000. Check whether the board can be available and operate normally (displayed as green). Ifso, the configuration of the master/slave subrack is correct.

----End

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 51: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2.12 Setting Manually Extended ECC CommunicationWhen there is no optical path between two or more NEs for communication, the Ethernet portof the SCC can be used to realize the extended ECC communication. If the number of NEsexceeds four, the manually extended ECC communication is recommended. During setting ofthe manually extended ECC communication, set one or more NEs to the server and other NEsto the client.

Prerequisite

The NE must be created on the T2000.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000

Background Information

The OptiX OSN 6800/3800 achieves extended ECC communication through the Ethernetinterface on the AUX board. The Ethernet interface can be connected to the Ethernet interfaceof another Huawei transmission equipment. In this way, the ECC communication betweendifferent products is achieved.

When configuring the manually extended ECC, configure one or multiple NEs as the server endand other NEs as the client end.

CAUTIONl The ECC extended mode of the remote NEs must be modified first, and that of the gateway

NE must be modified last.l The extended ECC communication is avoided between the subnet gateway NEs.

l Do not set the gateway NE to the server side.

NOTE

l One server NE can have a maximum of eight client NEs.

l The NE closest to the gateway NE is recommended to be the server NE.

Procedurel Setting the Client NE

1. Log in to the T2000.2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.3. Select any one NE as the server NE. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.4. Choose Communication > Communication Parameter from the left-hand Function

Tree. Observe the NE IP in the right-hand view and record the NE IP.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-23

Page 52: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

5. In the status figure of the ONE, right-click any one remote NE and select NEExplorer.

6. Choose > Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.

7. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.

8. Enter the IP of the server NE in the IP field and the port number in the Port field ofthe Set Client interface. The port number cannot be the same as the value entered inthe Port field of the Set Server interface.

NOTEThe port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the server NE.

9. Click Apply in Set Client interface.

10. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeededmessage. Click Close.

NOTE

l The IP addresses of NEs cannot be repeated and must be within the same subnet.

l The client NE can be the server NE of the next lower level. At that time, the client port and theserver port of the local NE can not be the same. For specific procedure, refer to "Setting the ServerNE".

l The port number must be within the range from 1601 to 1699, for example, 1610.

l Setting the Server NE

1. Log in to the T2000.

2. Double-click the ONE icon, and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

3. Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.

4. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the left-hand Function Tree.

5. Set the ECC Extended Mode to Specified mode in the right-hand Functional Panel.

6. Enter the IP of any one NE in the IP field and the port number in the Port field of theSet Client interface. The port number cannot be the same as the value entered in thePort field of the Set Server interface.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 53: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

l The port number is the port number of the local NE for communication with the client NE.

l The port number of the server NE must be the same as that of the client NE forcommunication.

7. Enter the port number in the Port field of the Set Server interface. The port numbermust be the consistent with that value entered in the Port field of the Set Clientinterface of the client NE.

8. Click Apply in Set Server interface.

9. An Operation Result dialog is displayed indicating an Operation succeededmessage. Click Close.

----End

2.13 Creating Fiber Connections in Graphic ModeIn graphic mode, you can create fiber connections on the Main Topology or the signal flowdiagram directly. This mode is applicable to scenarios where a small number of fiber connectionsare to be created one by one.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE maintainer" authority or higher.

The boards to be connected with the fiber or cable have been created.

Background Information

For service configuration, fibers between NEs and boards inside NEs need to be connected.

Connection between NEs can be done on the Main Topology. Connection between boards insidean NE can be done either on the Main Topology or in the optical NE signal flow diagram. Thelatter is recommended.

If the fiber information is retained on the NE side, you can use the Synchronize Fiber operationto synchronize the fiber information with the T2000 side. Refer to Synchronizing FiberConnections.

Procedurel Connect fibers between NEs.

1. Select the shortcut icon on the toolbar of the Main Topology and the cursorchanges to a "+".

2. Click the source ONE on the Main Topology. The Select the source end of thelink dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the source NE of the fiber or cable. Select the source board and port in theSelect the source end of the link dialog box.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-25

Page 54: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4. Click OK, and the source port is selected. The cursor changes to a "+".5. Click the sink ONE on the Main Topology. The Select the sink end of the link dialog

box is displayed.6. Select the sink NE of the fiber or cable. Select the sink board and port in the Select

the sink end of the link dialog box.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 55: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

7. Click OK, and the sink port is selected. The Create Fiber/Cable dialog box isdisplayed.

8. Enter the information of the fiber or cable in the Create Fiber/Cable dialog box.

NOTE

The WDM system adopts the two-fiber bidirectional mode to achieve bidirectionaltransmission. The created fiber connection is single-fiber unidirectional. For example, whenyou create the fiber connections of the FIU boards at two stations, you need to create anotherfiber connection in the other direction.

9. Click OK, and the fiber connection between ports is created.

NOTE

l Click OK, and then the fiber connection is created. Click Apply, and then you can start tocreate a new fiber connection.

l This operation is also applied to internal fiber connection of the NE. However, the operationefficiency is low. The signal flow diagram mode is recommended.

l Connect fibers between boards inside the NE.1. On the Main Topology, double-click the NE icon to display the NE status diagram.

In the NE status diagram, click Signal Flow Diagram.2. In the signal flow diagram, draw the board icons according to the engineering design

document. This is for convenience in fiber connection.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-27

Page 56: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3. Right-click in the blank inside the signal flow diagram, choose Create Fiber. Thenthe cursor turns to "+".

4. Click the source board of the fiber and choose the source port of the fiber. ClickOK. The cursor turns to "+".

5. Click the sink board of the fiber and choose the sink port of the fiber. Click OK. ACreate Fiber/Cable dialog box is displayed.

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 57: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

6. In Create Fiber/Cable dialog box, modify the attribute value according to actualrequirement.

NOTE

The WDM system adopts the two-fiber bidirectional mode to achieve bidirectionaltransmission. The created fiber connection is single-fiber unidirectional. For example, whenyou create the fiber connections of the SC2 board and the FIU board at one station, you needto create another fiber connection in the other direction.

7. Click OK to complete the settings.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 2 Configuring NE and Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

2-29

Page 58: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

After the internal fiber connections of the NE are created, you need to manually adjust thesignal flow that is generated by the system automatically.

----End

2 Configuring NE and NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 59: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3 Commissioning Optical Power

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the consequence, requirements and detailed instruction of optical powercommissioning.

3.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical PowerThis section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools of configuring optical power.

3.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OTU board.

3.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of tributary board.

3.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of line board.

3.5 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA OAU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of EDFA OAU board.

3.6 Commissioning Optical Power of Raman Amplifier BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of Raman amplifier board.

3.7 Commissioning Optical Power of OSC BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OSC board.

3.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of multiplexerand demultiplexer board.

3.9 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of FOADMboard.

3.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of ROADMboard.

3.11 Commissioning Optical Power of the DCMThe per-channel input optical power of the DCM should not be larger than –3 dBm.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-1

Page 60: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.12 Example of Commissioning Optical PowerThis section takes the Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioningprocedures of OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

3.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on 40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength SystemThis section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G (hereinafter referred to as40G) OTM and OLA, stations.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 61: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.1 Guidelines for Commissioning Optical PowerThis section describes the basic operations, methods, and tools of configuring optical power.

3.1.1 Basic RequirementsThis section describes the basic requirements of optical power commissioning.

3.1.2 General Commissioning ConsequenceThis section describes the general consequence of commissioning optical power.

3.1.3 Commissioning Tools and InstrumentsThe optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are needed in optical powercommissioning.

3.1.1 Basic RequirementsThis section describes the basic requirements of optical power commissioning.

Basic requirements of optical power commissioning are as follows:

l The optical power under commissioning should be between the allowable maximum andminimum values.

l Allowance is required to ensure that the power fluctuation within a range brings no impacton the services.

l Optical power commissioning should meet the requirement of system expansion from thecustomer.

Requirements of CWDM Commissioning:l The CWDM network does not support the OA. Only the optical power commissioning is

needed in CWDM commissioning. The OSNR and flatness commissioning are not needed.l Only the received optical power of the OTU is needed in optical power commissioning.

The specific commissioning requirements, procedures are similar to these of the DWDMsystem.

3.1.2 General Commissioning ConsequenceThis section describes the general consequence of commissioning optical power.

General Consequence of Optical Power CommissioningOptical power commissioning is to commission the optical power values of NEs and boards oneby one according to the optical signal flow, and to remove the abnormal attenuation of lines orboards according to the requirements on optical power, gain and insertion loss of the board.

The commissioning is performed according to the requirements of optical power commissioningfor the optical amplifier unit (OA), OTU, OSC boards.

Optical Power Commissioning ProceduresGenerally, the stations between the two OTMs in the OptiX WDM system form one networksegment. One network segment has two signal flow directions of transmit direction and receivedirection.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-3

Page 62: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

The OptiX WDM system commissions the optical power of each NE one by one according tothe signal flow in each network segment.

Firstly, complete the optical power commissioning of one OTM in transmit direction. Thencommissions the optical power of each downstream NE one by one and complete the opticalpower commissioning of destination OTM in receive direction. Finally, complete the opticalpower commissioning of the other signal flow in the reverse direction of the previous signalflow.

Project X is an example to introduce the optical power commissioning procedures.

Figure 3-1 shows the networking diagram of Project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F are theOptical OSN 6800 systems, which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A andONE C are the back-to-back OTM stations; the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLA stations,and the ONE E is the OADM station.

Figure 3-1 Figure 3-1 Networking diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

Station D OLAStation B OLA Station C 2OTM

135km/39dB 85km/27dB

80km/26dB 100km/30dB

55km/15dB 60km/16dB

:OTM :OLA : OADM

Project X consists of two network segments: A–B–C and A–F–E–D–C.

First follow the consequence to commission the optical power in A–B–C network segment.l Commission the optical power in A–B–C signal flow:

– Commission the optical power of station A in A-to-B transmit direction.– Commission the optical power of station B in A-to-B receive direction.– Commission the optical power of station B in B-to-C transmit direction.– Commission the optical power of station C in B-to-C receive direction.

l Commission the optical power in C–B–A signal flow:– Commission the optical power of station C in C-to-B transmit direction.– Commission the optical power of station B in C-to-B receive direction.– Commission the optical power of station B in B-to-A transmit direction.– Commission the optical power of station A in B-to-A receive direction.

Then refer to the previous procedures to complete the optical power commissioning of the A–F–E–D–C network segment in two directions.

NOTE

For the details about the NE commissioning, refer to 3.12 Example of Commissioning Optical Power.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 63: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.1.3 Commissioning Tools and InstrumentsThe optical power meter and the optical spectrum analyzer are needed in optical powercommissioning.

l Optical power meter: It is mainly used to test the optical power on the client side and theWDM side of the OTU, and the general optical power of the multiplexed signals.

l Optical spectrum analyzer: It is mainly used to test the optical power, optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) and the central wavelength of each wavelength in the multiplexedsignals.

Align the optical spectrum analyzer before using it to test the optical power. The methodto verify the alignment is as follows.

Test the optical power of the OUT optical interface on the OTU with an optical spectrumanalyzer and compare the value with the value tested by an optical power meter. If thedifference is less than 0.5 dB, the alignment is acceptable. If not, align the optical spectrumanalyzer again.

NOTE

The optical power of single wavelength in the multiplexed signals needs to be test with an optical spectrumanalyzer. The commissioning method is more accurate and does not need to consider the influence of noise.

3.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OTU board.

CAUTIONThe overload of the APD receiver laser is –9 dBm. If the input optical power is higher, the APDlaser may be damaged. Therefore, it is recommended to inserted the fiber loosely from the inputoptical interface of the OTU during commissioning. After commissioning, make sure the inputoptical power is lower than the receiver overload before you insert the fiber.

For the receiver sensitivity, overload and output optical power indices of the OTU, refer to theProduct Description.

3.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit LightThis section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.

3.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

3.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit LightThis section describes how to force the OTU board to emit light.

PrerequisiteThe NE must be created on the T2000.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-5

Page 64: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Tools, Equipments and materialsT2000

Background InformationThe signals accessed to the client side or the WDM side should be the service signals in actualtransmission or the optical signals generated by forcing the board to emit light.

The WDM side of the OTU board is forced to emit light by default. If it does not emit light, referto the following procedure to query whether the board is forced to emit light and set the boardto emit light.

Precautions

CAUTIONl The prerequisite for commissioning the ESC is forcing the OTU to emit light.

l After ESC commissioning is completed, the WDM-side interfaces of the OTU board keepbeing forced to emit light.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the T2000.

Step 2 Double click the ONE icon, and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

Step 3 Right-click the NE and select NE Explorer.

Step 4 Select the desired OTU from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, and chooseConfiguration > WDM interface from the Function Tree.

Step 5 Choose By Board/Port (Path).

Step 6 Choose Path in the drop-down list under the By Board/Port (Path) button.

Step 7 Click the General Attributes tab. Set the Automatic Laser Shutdown of the optical interfaceon the WDM side of the OTU to Disabled and the Laser State to Open.

Step 8 Click Apply.

----End

3.2.2 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OTU BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OTU board.

Commissioning Requirementsl Adjust the input power of the input optical interface RXn on the client side and the input

power of the input optical interface IN on the WDM side of the OTU to be within theoptimal range: from higher than the sensitivity value by 3 dBm to lower than the overloadvalue by 5 dBm.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 65: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

For a certain OTU, if the overload of the optical module is 0 dBm, and if the receiver sensitivity is–17 dBm, the receive optical power should be adjusted within the range from –14 dBm to –5 dBm.

l The optical preamplifier on the WDM side of the OTU has output the standard opticalpower of single wavelength. Hence, the input optical power on the WDM side can beadjusted on the basis of the actual optical power by adding, changing or removing the fixedoptical attenuators.

l After commissioning, insert the fiber into the input optical interface on the OTU when theinput optical power turns to normal.

3.3 Commissioning Optical Power of Tributary BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of tributary board.

Background InformationThe tributary boards include the TBE, TDX, TDG, TQX, TOM, TSXL, TQM and TQS.

For the specification of the tributary unit, refer to the Product Description.

Commissioning RequirementsBefore the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed into the corresponding tributaryunit, adjust the input power of the client-side optical interface RXn of the tributary unit to bewithin the optimal range: from higher than the sensitivity value by 3 dBm to lower than theoverload value by 5 dBm.

3.4 Commissioning Optical Power of Line BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of line board.

Background InformationThe line board includes the NS2 and ND2.

For the specification of the line unit, refer to the Product Description.

Commissioning Requirementsl Before the optical signals of single wavelength are accessed to the corresponding line unit,

adjust the input power of the WDM-side optical interface IN of the line unit to be withinthe optimal range: from higher than the sensitivity value by 3 dBm to lower than theoverload value by 5 dBm.

l Generally the commissioning of the output optical power is not needed. However, if thestation is an OADM station or configured with wavelength protection, adjust the VOA ofthe output interface on the WDM side of the line unit to flat the gain of each add wavelengthamplified by the OAU.

3.5 Commissioning Optical Power of EDFA OAU BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of EDFA OAU board.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-7

Page 66: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

The EDFA OAU board includes OAU1, OBU1, OBU2 and HBA.l Four types of OAU1 are valid: OAU101, OAU102, OAU103 and OAU105.

l Three types of OBU1 are valid: OBU101, OBU103 and OBU104.

l One type of OBU2 is valid: OBU205.

The relation between the multiplexed signal and the single wavelength of the OAU in terms ofthe optical power is as follows.

Optical power of multiplexed signal = Optical power of single wavelength + 10lgN (N is thenumber of wavelengths of the multiplexed signal)

3.5.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OAU BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OAU board.

3.5.2 Adjusting the Gains of OAUThis section describes how to adjust the gains of the OAU.

3.5.1 Adjusting the Input Optical Power of OAU BoardThis section describes how to adjust the input optical power of OAU board.

Commissioning RequirementsAdjust the average single wavelength input optical power of the IN interface of the OAU andmake it close to the typical input power of single wavelength. Ensure that the number ofwavelengths whose optical power is larger than the typical value is extremely close to the numberof wavelengths whose optical power is smaller than the typical value.l Typical input power of single wavelength of the HBA is –19 dBm (40-channel) and –12

dBm (10-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OBU101 is –20 dBm (40-channel) and –

23 dBm (80-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OBU103 is –19 dBm (40-channel) and –

22 dBm (80-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OBU104 is –17 dBm (40-channel) and –

20 dBm (80-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OBU205 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –

19 dBm (80-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OAU101 is –16 dBm (40-channel) and –

19 dBm (80-channel).l Typical input power of single wavelength of the OAU103 is –20 dBm (40-channel) and –

23 dBm (80-channel).

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the OAU is addedwith a VOA is higher than the typical input power of single wavelength, adjust the VOA beforethe OAU to make the average single wavelength input optical power reach the typical value.

If the average single wavelength input optical power before the input end of the OAU is addedwith a VOA is lower than the typical input power of single wavelength, no VOA is needed.

3.5.2 Adjusting the Gains of OAUThis section describes how to adjust the gains of the OAU.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 67: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Prerequisite

The commissioning of the optical power of the upstream board must be completed.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000, optical power meter

Commissioning Requirements

For the OAU1, set the gain to ensure that the mean output optical power equals the maximumoutput optical power of single wavelength, which is 4 dBm. Gain = Maximum output power ofsingle wavelength – Mean input optical power of single wavelength.

After setting the gain, use the optical spectrum analyzer to check whether the mean output opticalpower of single wavelength is within the range from 3.5 dBm to 4.5 dBm. If it exceeds thisrange, finely tune the gain value.

l If the mean output optical power of single wavelength is more than 4.5 dBm, decrease thegain value to adjust the mean output optical power of single wavelength to 4 dBm. Theallowable deviation is within ±0.5 dBm.

l If the mean output optical power of single wavelength is less than 3.5 dBm, increase thegain value to adjust the mean output optical power of single wavelength to 4 dBm. Theallowable deviation is within ±0.5 dBm.

Procedure

Step 1 Confirm the board type and query the adjustable range of the gain.

Step 2 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the input power of the RDC interfaceand the output power of the TDC interface and calculate the insertion loss of the DCM.

Insertion loss of the DCM = output power of the TDC – input power of the RDC

Step 3 Calculate the settable range of the gain of the OAU board according to the intermediate insertionloss.

Settable Gain range = gain range of the OAU – insertion loss of the DCM

Step 4 Ensure that the input power of the OAU is the average input power of single wavelength Pin.Calculate the gain value.

Gain = maximum output power of single wavelength – average input power of single wavelength

Step 5 Check whether the gain is within the value range calculated in Step 3.

l If the gain is less than the minimum gain calculated in Step 3, increase the attenuation valueof the VOA at the input end of the OAU to decrease the average input power of singlewavelength to the standard value.

l If the gain is more than the maximum gain calculated in Step 3, decrease the attenuationvalue of the VOA at the input end of the OAU to increase the average input power of singlewavelength. If the gain cannot meet the requirement, confirm with the network designer thatthe network design value is correct or not.

Step 6 Enter the NE Explorer on the T2000.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-9

Page 68: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 7 Select the desired OAU1 from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, and chooseConfiguration > WDM interface from the Function Tree.

Step 8 Choose By Board/Port (Path).

Step 9 In the General Attributes tab, set the Nominal Gain of the OAU1 board.

Step 10 Click Apply.

Step 11 Click Query. Query the Nominal Gain displayed on the T2000. If the gain difference of theactual value and the set nominal value is within 0.5 dB, the setting succeeds. If the setting fails,check whether the gain set is within the gain range.

----End

3.6 Commissioning Optical Power of Raman AmplifierBoard

This section describes how to commission the optical power of Raman amplifier board.

Precautions

DANGERRaman amplifier emits strong light. Do not insert or remove the fiber connector when the laseris working, to avoid damage to human body. The laser safety level of CRPC is CLASS 4. Themaximum output power of each optical interface is more than 27 dBm (500 mW).

Commissioning RequirementsRaman amplifiers extend the distance of a span and improve the OSNR. After the Ramanamplifier is used, the optical power that is close to the fiber line should be tested on the LINEinterface on the Raman amplifier. Shut down the pump lasers of the Raman amplifier before thetest.

NOTE

There are two types Raman board of OptiX OSN 6800: CRPC01 and CRPC03. For details ofcommissioning CRPC board, refer to A Commissioning CRPC Board.

The following are the basic commissioning requirements of Raman amplifier unit:l Test the optical power on the SYS interface of the Raman unit when the laser is enabled

and when it is disabled. Determine the on-off gain of the Raman unit.l On-off gain = Optical power on the SYS interface when the laser is enabled – Optical power

on the SYS interface when the Raman laser is disabledl When the Raman amplifier is used, the output optical power is rather great. The greater the

optical power is, the higher the requirements of the fiber jumper become. Great opticalpower may bring damages to equipment and injuries to human body. Hence, the power ofthe Raman pumping light should be as low as possible on the premise that the on-off gainis not less than 10 dB. The maximum optical power should be not more than 29 dBm.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 69: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l Raman amplifier is used in the case of extremely low input optical power. When the SYSinterface of the Raman amplifier is connected to the OAU, if the input optical power of theOAU is smaller than the standard per-channel input optical power of the OAU, no variableattenuator is required. If the input optical power of the OAU is larger than the standard per-channel input optical power of the OAU, a variable attenuator is required.

l The output optical power reaches 27 dBm when the Raman amplifier is used in backwardor forward pumping. Be careful of this. The fiber connector should be the special LSH/APC fiber connector. If the PC fiber connector is used, great reflection will burn the fiberconnector.

l As for the Raman board used for backward pumping, the strong pump light enters the fiberthrough the input end (LINE) instead of the output end (SYS). Do not add any attenuatoror fiber jumper before the input end.

l The bending radius of the fiber that goes to the LINE port of the Raman amplifier shouldmeet the requirement. The bending should not be too great; otherwise, the fiber jumper isburnt.

l The laser is by default turned off after the Raman amplifier is powered on. The laser canbe turned on by issuing a command.

l Before the laser of the Raman amplifier is turned on, connect the fiber of the input end(LINE port of the Raman Amplifier) and that of the FIU. Keep the fiber clean whenremoving or inserting the fiber. If there is dirt on the surface of the connector, the connectorcan be easily damaged.

l The Raman amplifier has a very strict requirement on the loss of the near-end line fiber.Such a fiber should have no connector within the distance of 0 km to 20 km (12 mi.). Thefibers should be connected to each other by splicing.

l The requirement on the fiber line from the Raman board lies on the single-point additionalloss in the line cable. The following are the requirements of the single-point additional loss:– 0 km–20 km (0 mi.–12 mi.): Do not use fiber connectors.

– 0 km–10 km (0 mi.–6 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.1 dB (G.652)or 0.2 dB (G.655).

– 10 km–20 km (6 mi.–12 mi.): The single-point additional loss is less than 0.2 dB (G.652) or 0.4 dB (G.655) and the single-point return loss is not less than 40 dB.

Setting Jumper

There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 andJ4.Figure 3-2 shows the number of each jumper.

Figure 3-2 Jumpers on the CRPC board

CPU

J3J4

1 2

9 10

10

12

9

CRPC

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-11

Page 70: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensurethe normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.l Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.

l Do not connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J3.

l Do not connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J3.

l Do not connect jumpers 7 to 8 in J3.

l Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3.

l Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.

l Connect jumpers 3 to 4 in J4.

l Connect jumpers 5 to 6 in J4.

Jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are used to set the IP of the CRPC board. When several CRPCboards are used in an NE, an IP for each board is required to prevent IP conflict. The followingare jumper setting regulations:l When jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are not connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.28.

l When jumpers 7–8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9–10 are not connected, the board IPis 192.168.0.29.

l When jumpers 7–8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9–10 are connected, the board IPis 192.168.0.30.

l When jumpers 7–8 and 9–10 in J4 are connected, the board IP is 192.168.0.31.

3.7 Commissioning Optical Power of OSC BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of OSC board.

The OptiX OSN 6800 offers two types of supervisory channels:l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)

l Electrical supervisory channel (ESC)

The OSC requires the optical supervisory channel unit SC1 and SC2. The unit is used to transmitand receive the supervisory information.

The ESC does not need the optical supervisory channel units. In this mode, the opticaltransponder unit (OTU) multiplexes the supervisory information into the service channels fortransmission.

NOTE

Once the boards work, the ESC and OSC are enabled by default.

3.7.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.

3.7.2 Commissioning the ESC boardThis section describes how to commission the ESC board.

3.7.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of OSC BoardThis section describes how to commission the optical power of the OSC board.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 71: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Prerequisite

The commissioning of the optical power at the transmit end of the upstream station must becompleted.

Tools, Equipments and Materials

Optical power meter, fixed attenuator

Commissioning Requirements

The received optical power of OSC is within the range from –48 dBm to –3 dBm, and thetransmitted optical power of OSC is within the range from –4 dBm to 0 dBm. Basic requirementsof the optical power commissioning on the OSC are as follows:

l The optical power of the OSC should be within the range from –45 dBm to –8 dBm.

l A 15 dB fixed attenuator is required for the interconnection between the OSCs in the station.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of the OSC unit.

l The RM interface of the OSC board connects with the TM interface of FIU board in the localstation.

l The TM interface of the OSC board connects with the RM interface of FIU board in the localstation.

Step 2 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the transmit opticalpower of the OSC board. It should be in the range from –4 dBm to 0 dBm.

Step 3 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then measure the actual receiveoptical power of the OSC board. It should be in the range from –48 dBm to –3 dBm.

NOTE

If the result does not meet the requirement, clean the optical fiber. If the problem still exists, check whether theOSC is faulty. Clear the fault.

Step 4 Set the wavelength of the optical power meter to 1510 nm. Then test the insertion loss betweenthe IN and TM interfaces, and between the RM and OUT interfaces of the FIU. The values shouldbe less than 1.5 dBm.

----End

3.7.2 Commissioning the ESC boardThis section describes how to commission the ESC board.

Commissioning Requirements

When the OTU starts to work and the service is normal, the ESC route is set up.

Forcing the Laser of the OTU board, refer to 3.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-13

Page 72: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Procedure

Step 1 Log in T2000, select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.

Step 2 Select the OTU board from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > WDM Interface。

Step 3 Choose Channel。

Step 4 Click Query, and ensure the Laser on the WDM side of the OTU board is open.

Step 5 Choose Board,and set ESC Auxiliary Switch to Enabled。

Step 6 Click Apply。

----End

3.8 Commissioning Optical Power of Multiplexer andDemultiplexer Board

This section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of multiplexerand demultiplexer board.

Only the VMUX board of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit have strict requirements foroptical power commissioning. The M40, D40, and FIU have no requirements for optical powercommissioning, they only need to note the insertion loss.

3.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of M40V andD40V board

3.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of FIU board.

3.8.1 Commissioning the Optical Power of M40V and D40V BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of M40V andD40V board

Commissioning Requirements

Adjust the optical power and the flatness of OSNR of each wavelength at the receive end to meetthe requirements by adjusting the built-in VOA.l Adjust the attenuation of the VOAs in each channel of the M40V/D40V at the transmit end

to 5 dB before commissioning.l Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the MON interface of the last OAU of the signal

flow. Test the optical power and the OSNR of each channel in WDM mode.l According to the optical spectrum figure, find out the channels with the largest or the

smallest optical power (or OSNR). Adjust the VOA in the corresponding channels of theM40V/D40V to make the optical power (or OSNR) closer to the average value.

l Ensure that the maximum difference of optical power among all the channels is within 4dB and that of OSNR is within 2 dB.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 73: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

Generally the output optical power values of all OAUs do not have obvious change after the previouscommissioning. If the change is obvious, adjust the VOA before the first OAU of the signal flow to makethe input optical power reach the standard value. Do not need to adjust the successive OAUs. Ensure thatthe OSNR is flat and the optical power is around the standard value.

3.8.2 Commissioning the Optical Power of FIU BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of FIU board.

Commissioning Requirements

For FIU boards, note the insertion loss of them.

l IN–>TC insertion loss = Input optical power of IN interface – Output optical power of TCinterface

l RC–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RC interface – Output optical power ofOUT interface

l IN–>TM insertion loss = Input optical power of IN interface – Output optical power of TMinterface

l RM–>OUT insertion loss = Input optical power of RM interface – Output optical powerof OUT interface

The optical power can be measured with an optical power meter and an optical spectrumanalyzer. The basic requirements of measurement are as follows.

Method one: measurement with an optical power meter

l For IN–>TC insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT interface in the caseof disconnecting the fiber of the RM interface. The insertion loss must be equal to or lessthan 1.0 dB.

l For IN–>TM insertion loss, the insertion loss must be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, measure the optical power of the OUT interface in the caseof disconnecting the fiber of the RC interface. The insertion loss must be equal to or lessthan 1.5 dB.

Method two: measurement with an optical spectrum analyzer

l For IN–>TC insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN interface with that of TCinterface at a certain wavelength with an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss mustbe equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For RC–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT interface with that ofRC interface at a certain wavelength with an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion lossmust be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

l For IN–>TM insertion loss, compare the optical power of the IN interface at 1510 nm withthat of TM interface at 1510 nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion loss mustbe equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

l For RM–>OUT insertion loss, compare the optical power of the OUT interface at 1510 nmwith that of RM interface at 1510 nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. The insertion lossmust be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-15

Page 74: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.9 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of FOADMboard.

Networking with MR2+MR2

Figure 3-3 shows the diagram of networking with MR2+MR2.

Figure 3-3 Diagram of networking with MR2+MR2

FIU

FIU

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

OAOUT OUT

OUT INOUT OUT

TC

RCININ

INRC

OA OA

OA

MR2 MR2

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

INTC OUT

MO

MI

MI

MO

East

1 2 3 4

West

1: west FIU 2: west optical amplifier board at the receive end3: east optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: east FIU

Commissioning Requirements

The commissioning requirements of the FOADM board such as the MR2 are as follows.l In pass-through direction, adjust the VOA between the OAU and the MR2, the VOA

between MR2s, and make the pass-through wavelength meet the requirement of the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end.

l In drop wavelength direction, add a proper fixed optical attenuator at the input end of theOTU, and make the drop wavelength meet the requirement of input optical power of theOTU.

l In add wavelength direction, adjust the VOA between the OUT interface of the OTU addingwavelengths and the MR2 to ensure the gain flatness between the add wavelength and thepass-through wavelength.

3.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM BoardThis section describes the basic requirements of commissioning the optical power of ROADMboard.

This section takes the west-to-east signal flow as an example to illustrate the commissioningrequirements of the ROADM in four kinds of ring networks with:

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 75: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l ROAM+ROAM

l WSD9+WSM9

l WSD9+RMU9

l WSMD4+WSMD4

NOTE

l The requirements of the intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming of the WSM9, WSD9, RMU9and WSMD4 are the same.

l The automatic power adjustment mode must be chosen in creating optical cross-connection. Forapplications not supporting automatic power adjustment, choose the manual power adjustment mode.

l The optical power of the OUT interface at the receive end and the rated optical power of the IN interfaceat the transmit end of the OAU have their default values on the T2000.

3.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with ROAM+ROAM.

3.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSD9+WSM9.

3.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSD9+RMU9.

3.10.4 Adjusting the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4.

3.10.1 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (ROAM+ROAM)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with ROAM+ROAM.

Networking with ROAM+ROAMFigure 3-4shows the diagram of networking with ROAM+ROAM.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-17

Page 76: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-4 Diagram of networking with ROAM+ROAM

FIU

OA

U

OA

U

ROAMFIU

OA

U

OA

U

1 2 3 4

OBU

D40

OTU

OTU

ROAM

D40

OTU

OTU

OBU

West East

IN OUT

INOUT

OUTIN

INOUT

1: west FIU 2: west optical amplifier board at the receive end3: east optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: east FIU

Commissioning Requirementsl Automatic power adjustment is supported in add and pass-through wavelength directions.

– In add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU atthe transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN interface ofeast OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Then thesystem automatically determines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that theinput optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements in addingwavelength.

– In pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to theeast FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN interface of east OAU at the transmitend to the typical input power of single wavelength. Then the system automaticallydetermines and adjusts the output optical power to ensure that the input optical powerof the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements in pass-through wavelength.

l Manual power adjustment is needed in drop wavelength direction.Configure the fixed optical attenuator at the IN interface of the west OTU at the receiveend. Select the fixed optical attenuator according to the input optical power of the OTU toensure that the input optical power meets the requirements. The VOA (in the dashed frame)between the ROAM and D40 boards is used to adjust the input optical power of the opticalamplifier to a value within the nominal range. If the input optical power is within thenominal range when the VOA is not added, the VOA is not required.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 77: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and anavalanche photodiode (APD) is configured on the WDM side of the OTU board at the receiveend, the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the PIN photodiode is configured at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in the dashed frameare required.

3.10.2 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+WSM9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSD9+WSM9.

Networking with WSD9+WSM9Figure 3-5 shows the diagram of networking with WSD9+WSM9.

Figure 3-5 Diagram of networking with WSD9+WSM9

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

WSM9 WSD9

West

WSD9

OAINOUT

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

WSM9

OTU

OTU

M40

OTU

OTU

East

1 2 3 4

1: west FIU 2: west optical amplifier board at the receive end3: east optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: east FIU

Commissioning RequirementsAutomatic power adjustment is supported in add, drop and pass-through wavelength directions.l In drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the

west OTU at the receive end. and set the optical power of the OUT interface of the westOAU at the receive end to maximum output power of single wavelength. Then the systemautomatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of theWSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets the requirements in dropwavelength.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-19

Page 78: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to the OTUor through the MR2 or D40 to the OTU.

l In pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the eastFIU. Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OAU at the receive end tomaximum output power of single wavelength, and the rated optical power of the INinterface of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength.Then the system automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in eachchannel of the WSD9 and WSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at thetransmit end meets the requirements in passing through wavelength.

l In add wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at thetransmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical power of the IN interface of the eastOAU at the transmit end to typical input power of single wavelength. Then the systemautomatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of theWSM9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets therequirements in adding wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU board directly adds/drops wavelengths or when it adds/drops wavelengths through throughthe MRX board, a VOA (in the dashed frame) needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmitend. When the OTU board adds wavelengths through the M40 board, the VOA is not required.

3.10.3 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM Board (WSD9+RMU9)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSD9+RMU9.

Networking with WSD9+RMU9Figure 3-6 shows the diagram of networking with WSD9+RMU9.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 79: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-6 Diagram of networking with WSD9+RMU9

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT

IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

RMU9 WSD9

WSD9

OAINOUT

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

D40

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

RMU9

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

West East

M40

ROA

ROA

M40

1 2 3 4OA

TOA

OA

TOA MRX

MRX

1: west FIU 2: west optical amplifier board at the receive end3: east optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: east FIU

Commissioning Requirementsl Automatic power adjustment is supported in drop wavelength, pass-through wavelength,

add wavelength directly of the OTU, and add wavelength through the M40V board.– In drop wavelength direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to

the west OTU at the receive end, and set the optical power of the OUT interface of thewest OAU at the receive end to the maximum output power of single wavelength. Thenthe system automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in eachchannel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OTU meets therequirements in drop wavelength.

NOTE

Automatic power adjustment can be realized when the WSD9 drops wavelength directly to theOTU or through the MR2 or D40 to the OTU.

– In pass-through direction: Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to theeast FIU. Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OAU at the receiveend to the maximum output power, and the rated optical power of the IN interface ofthe east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Thenthe system automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of the VOA in eachchannel of the WSD9 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU at the transmitend meets the requirements in passing through wavelength.

– In add wavelength directly of the OTU direction: Create the optical cross-connectionfrom the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU, and set the rated optical powerof the IN interface of the east OAU at the transmit end to the typical input power ofsingle wavelength. Then the system automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuationof the VOA in each channel of the RMU9 to ensure that the input optical power of theOAU at the transmit end meets the requirements in add wavelength.

l When wavelengths are added through the MR2/MR4/MR8 board or the M40 board, theoptical power needs to be manually adjusted.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-21

Page 80: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

When wavelengths are added through the M40/M40V board, an optical amplifier needs tobe configured between the TOA and ROA on the RMU9 board, and a VOA needs to beconfigured between the ROA and the optical amplifier. When wavelengths are addedthrough the MR2/MR4/MR8 board, the TOA and the ROA interfaces of the RMU9 aredirectly connected to each other by fibers.Adjust the VOA between the OTU and the MR2, MR4, MR8 or M40 board to ensure thatthe flatness of the input optical power of add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengthson the east OAU at the transmit end meets the system requirements.

l The add wavelength signal of the RMU9 must meet a certain requirement to enable theAPE function in networking with WSD9+RMU9.– Configure the VA1 or VA4 board between the OTU and the RMU in the case that the

OTU adds wavelength directly to the RMU9, the APE function can be realizedautomatically.

– Use the M40V board in the case that the OTU adds wavelength to the RMU9 throughthe multiplexer and demultiplexer boards, the APE function can be realizedautomatically.

– If the VA1, VA4 and M40V are not used, the APE cannot be realized.

3.10.4 Adjusting the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the basic commissioning requirements of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4.

Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4This section describes the commissioning requirements of the WSMD4. In this section, thenetworking diagram for two-dimensional grooming is used as an example for illustration. Thecommissioning requirements of multi-dimensional grooming are similar. Figure 3-7 shows thediagram of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 81: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-7 Diagram of networking with WSMD4+WSMD4

FIU

FIU

OAOUT

OUT IN

IN

OA

OAIN OUT

WSMD4

West

OAINOUT

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

East

D40

WSMD4

D40

1 2 3 4

M40 M40

AM1DM1

AM4

DM4

DM4

AM4

AM1 DM1OUT

IN

IN

OUT

OA OA

1: west FIU 2: west optical amplifier board at the receive end3: east optical amplifier board at the transmit end 4: east FIU

NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical interfaces of the WSMD4 board are not shown.The two pairs of interfaces are used for signal grooming in other direction, respectively.

l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical interface by the OTUboard.

Commissioning Requirements

The commissioning requirements of the WSMD4 are as follows:l In the drop wavelength direction, manual power adjustment is required.

You need to select and configure a fixed attenuator at the IN optical interface of the OTUboard on the east and west receive end, respectively, according to the input optical powerrange of the OTU board. In this way, the input optical power to the OTU board can meetthe OTU design requirement. The optical power of the VOA (in the dashed frame) betweenthe demultiplexer and WSMD4 should be adjusted so that the input optical power is withinthe nominal input range of the optical amplifier. If the input optical power is already withinthe nominal input range of the optical amplifier when the VOA is not added, the VOA isnot required.

NOTE

l If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end,the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APDmodule is configured on the the WDM side of OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA arenot required.

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA inthe dashed frame need to be configured.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-23

Page 82: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l In pass-through direction, automatically adjusting the optical power is supported.

Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and from the eastFIU to the west FIU. The system automatically calculates and adjusts the attenuation of theVOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the input optical power of the OAU atthe transmit end meets the requirements of the pass-through wavelength.

l In add wavelength direction, automatically adjusting the optical power is supported.

Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIUand from the west OTU to the west FIU. Then the system automatically calculates andadjusts the attenuation of the VOA in each channel of the WSMD4 to ensure that the inputoptical power of the OAU at the transmit end meets the requirements in adding wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRX, a VOA (in the solid frame)needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengthsthrough the M40, the VOA is not required.

3.11 Commissioning Optical Power of the DCMThe per-channel input optical power of the DCM should not be larger than –3 dBm.

Prerequisite

Fiber connections on the DCM must be correct.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, fiber jumper

Procedure

Step 1 Measure the input optical power of the DCM. The per-channel input optical power should notbe larger than –3 dBm.

Step 2 Measure the output optical power of the DCM.

Step 3 Calculate the DCM insertion loss. The insertion loss should be within the specification range.

DCM insertion loss = Input optical power of DCM – Output optical power of DCM

----End

Related Information

For details on the specifications of the DCM insertion loss, refer to the Product Description.

3.12 Example of Commissioning Optical PowerThis section takes the Project X as an example to introduce the optical power commissioningprocedures of OTM, OLA and OADM stations.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 83: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

CAUTIONEnsure that the interfaces and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. If not, it influencesthe system performance.

l All the channels must be accessed with service signals or forced to emit light before opticalpower commissioning. Hence, all the OTU can emit light normally. Then startcommissioning station by station.

l Enable the performance monitoring of NEs during optical power commissioning. Comparethe value reported by the NE and the value tested by instruments. Ensure that the two valuesof optical power are the same.

NOTE

The optical power queried by the T2000 is general optical power. The difference between the value andthe value tested by instruments should be within ± 1 dB.

3.12.1 Example DescriptionThis section describes the networking of Project X.

3.12.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit EndThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow at thetransmit end of an OTM station.

3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLAThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in anOLA station.

3.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive EndThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow at thereceive end of an OTM station.

3.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADMThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theFOADM station.

3.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.

3.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.

3.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.

3.12.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.

3.12.1 Example DescriptionThis section describes the networking of Project X.

Figure 3-8 shows the networking diagram of the Project X. The ONEs A, B, C, D, E and F arethe Optical OSN 6800 systems which form the ring network. Among these ONEs, the ONE A

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-25

Page 84: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

and ONE C are the back-to-back OTM stations, the ONE B, ONE D and ONE F are the OLAstations, and the ONE E is the OADM station.

The station E can use the FOADM boards or ROADM boards to form the network.

l If it uses the FOADM boards, refer to the 3.9 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADMBoard for commissioning description.

l If it uses the ROADM boards, refer to the 3.10 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADMBoard for commissioning description.

Figure 3-8 Network diagram of Project X

Station A 2OTM Station F OLA Station E OADM

Station D OLAStation B OLA Station C 2OTM

135km/39dB 85km/27dB

80km/26dB 100km/30dB

55km/15dB 60km/16dB

: OTM :OLA : OADM

NOTE

In the commissioning example, the signal flow from west to east is taken as an example to illustrate thecommissioning procedure. The commissioning method of the signal flow from east to west is the same asthat of the signal flow from west to east.

3.12.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit EndThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow at thetransmit end of an OTM station.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

Tools, Equipments and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 85: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Set-up Diagram

Figure 3-9 Fiber connection of OTM station A

M40

M01

M02

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

DCM

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To F

DCMTDC RDC

OUT IN OUT OUT TC

RCIN

IN

OUT

TC OUT IN

To B

OUT

INININRC

Station A

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OBU1

IN

West East

LQM

L4G

LSX

LQM

L4G

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

L4G

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

L4G

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

CRPC

LINE SYS

VOA Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface Rx on the client side of the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 Access the signal of the client side on east OTU.

Step 3 Query the bar code of the front panel or manufacturing information of the board to obtain theinformation of the optical module on the client side of the OTU.

Step 4 Obtain the launched optical power and information of optical module on the client side. Comparethe launched optical power of the client equipment with the received optical power on the clientside of the OTU to prepare the fixed optical attenuator beforehand.

Step 5 Test the optical power of fiber jumper of the RX interface on the client side of the OTU with anoptical power meter.

Step 6 Add the fixed optical attenuator to make the input optical power of the OTU meet therequirements.

Step 7 If all input optical powers meet the requirements of the OTU, insert the fiber into the RX interfaceof the OTU and record the input optical powers of the RX interface in the commissioning record.

Step 8 Check whether the OUT interfaces on the WDM sides of all east OTU emit light. If they do notemit light, check whether the accessed services are normal, and whether lasers of the OTU areopen.

Step 9 Test the optical power of the OUT interface on the WDM side of the OTU with an optical powermeter.

Step 10 Test the input optical power of the Mn interface of the M40, and record the value in thecommissioning record. If the difference between the optical power of the Mn interface and theOUT on the WDM side of the OTU exceeds 1 dB, check the routing and cleanness of the fibers.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-27

Page 86: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 11 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT interface of the M40 to scan the multiplexedsignal. Adjust the attenuator before the M40 to adjust the optical power flatness of addwavelengths.

Step 12 Record the optical power of each wavelength and multiplexed signal and calculate the insertionloss of each wavelength of the M40. Check whether the insertion loss of each wavelength meetsthe requirements after passing through the M40. If the optical power is abnormal, check the fiberconnection of the Mn interface.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN interface on the East-Transmit-to-West-Receive OBU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Test the optical power of theIN interface of the OBU1.

Step 14 Adjust the VOA connected to the output optical interface on the OTU, to ensure the flatness ofthe optical power of all the wavelengths at the IN optical interface on the OBU1.

Step 15 Test the optical power of each output wavelength of the OUT interface on the OBU1 with anoptical spectrum analyzer. Check whether the mean output optical power of single wavelengthis in the standard range.

Step 16 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = output optical power of singlewavelength - input optical power of single wavelength. The gain flatness of single wavelengthshould be less than 2.0 dB.

Step 17 Record the optical power of IN interface and OUT interface, input and output optical power,gain of each wavelength on the OBU1.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by the T2000. Thedifference between the value on the T2000 and the test value should be less than 2.0 dB.

Step 19 Test the input optical power of the RC interface of the FIU with an optical power meter. If theoptical power difference between the RC interface of the FIU and the OUT interface of the OBU1is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanness of optical fibers.

Step 20 Test the output optical power of the OUT interface of the FIU with an optical power meter (inthe case of disconnecting the fiber to the RM interface). Calculate the insertion loss from RC toOUT interface of the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Step 21 Test the output optical power of the TM2 interface on the SC2 with an optical power meter, andthen test the input optical power of the RM interface on the FIU. If the difference between thetwo values is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanness of the optical fibers.

Step 22 Test the output optical power of the OUT interface on the FIU with an optical power meter (inthe case of disconnecting the fiber to the RC interface). Calculate the insertion loss from RM toOUT interface of the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 23 Test the output optical power on the ODF side. Compare the value with the output optical powerof the OUT interface of the FIU to check whether the fiber is correctly routed.

----End

3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLAThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in anOLA station.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 87: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station A at the transmit end must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

Set-up Diagram

Figure 3-10 Fiber connection of OLA station B

SC2FIUTo A

DCM

OUT IN

IN

OUT

TC

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1DCM

OUT TCIN

OAU1

TDCRDC

OBU1OUT RCIN

FIU To C

OUT

IN

Station B

West East

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN interface on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Comparethe value with optical power of the OUT interface on the east FIU of station A to calculate theline attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation islarger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determinewhether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty,clear the fault accordingly.

Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN interface and the output optical power of the TM interfaceon the west FIU at 1510nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power valuesin the commissioning record.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN interface to the TM interface of the west FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 interface on the SC2 with an optical spectrum analyzer.Add a proper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dB.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-29

Page 88: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 interface of the SC2 with an optical spectrum analyzer.Record the input optical power of the RM1 interface and the output optical power of the TM2interface in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM interface and the output optical power of the OUTinterface on the east FIU at 1510nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical powervalues in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM interface to the OUT interface on the east FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN interface and the output optical power of the TC interfaceon the west FIU at a certain wavelength with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the opticalpower values in the commissioning record.

Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN interface to the TC interface on the west FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Step 10 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN interface on the East-Transmit-to-West-Receive OBU to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the VOA before the OBUto commission the mean input optical power of single wavelength of the OBU to typical value.

Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the DCM. Calculate the insertion loss of the VOAand DCM.

Step 12 The optical power commissioning method of the OBU is the same as that at the transmit end ofthe OTM. For details, refer to Step 14 through Step 18 in 3.12.2 Commissioning Optical Powerof OTM Transmit End.

Step 13 Test the input optical power of the RC interface and the output optical power of the OUT interfaceof the east FIU at a certain wavelength with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the opticalpower values in the commissioning record.

Step 14 Calculate the insertion loss from the RC interface to the OUT interface on the east FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

----End

3.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive EndThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow at thereceive end of an OTM station.

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 89: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Set-up Diagram

Figure 3-11 Fiber connection of OTM station C

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC2

D40

D40

OAU1

FIU

M40

OUT OUT

To B

DCM

TDC RDC

OUT IN

OUT

OUT TC

RCININ

OUT

TCOUT IN

To D

OUT

ININRC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

West East

LQM

L4G

LSX

LQM

L4G

LSX

RxTxD01

D02

D40

LQM

L4G

LSX

D01

D02

D40

LQM

L4G

LSX

Rx TxM01

M02

M40

M01

M02

M40

DCMIN

Station C

VOA Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to the Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to the Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power ofOLA.

Step 7 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN interface on the East-Transmit-to-West-Receive OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the optical power andOSNR of each wavelength of the IN interface on the OAU1.

Step 8 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the OUT interface on the East-Transmit-to-West-Receive OAU1 to scan the multiplexed signal. Adjust the gain of the OAU1on the T2000 to commission the launched optical power of single wavelength of the OAU1 tothe maximum value.

NOTE

For the methods and requirements of gain adjustment of the OAU, refer to the 3.5 Commissioning OpticalPower of EDFA OAU Board.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-31

Page 90: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 9 Calculate the gains of each wavelength of the OAU1. Record the input and output optical power,gain of each wavelength, and the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal.

Step 10 Check whether the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal is compliant to thetypical value by the T2000.

Step 11 The tested OSNR of each received wavelength must be more than 20 dB. The other testingindices are the same as what mentioned before.

Step 12 The commissioning method of the East-Transmit-to-West-Receive OBU and DCM is the sameas that of the OLA station. For specific procedures, refer to Step 10 through Step 12 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 13 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN interface on the west D40to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of each wavelength of the Dn interface on the D40 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be less than8 dB, and the maximum difference between the insertion loss values must be less than 2.0 dB.

Step 16 Test the input optical power of the IN interface on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whetherthe optical power of the IN interface on the OTU is within the standard range.

NOTE

If a PIN receiver is used on the WDM side of the OTU, no fixed optical attenuator is needed. If an APDis used on the WDM side of the OTU, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be added to ensure that theinput optical power of the IN interface of the OTU meets the requirements. If the optical power does notmeet the requirements, add, change or remove the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the received opticalpower is within the standard range.

Step 17 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN interface of the OTU after the input optical powermeets the requirements.

Step 18 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctlyconnected. The fiber attenuation must be less than 1 dB.

Step 19 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by the T2000. The difference betweenthe values on the T2000 and the test values must be less than 2.0 dB. The number of errorcorrections in 15-minute of the board with FEC function is required to be less than 100,000. Ifthe number of error corrections is comparatively large, locate the fault.

Step 20 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the clientequipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RXinterfaces on the client sides of all OTU of station C at the ODF side. In addition, a fixed opticalattenuator needs to be added before the RX interface.

NOTE

3.12.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit End, 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA and 3.12.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End shows the commissioningprocess for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning of the multiplex sections at OTM and OLAstations is similar.

----End

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 91: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3.12.5 Commissioning Optical Power of FOADMThis section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theFOADM station.

Prerequisite

The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

This section takes the station E formed by the MR2s as an example to describe the optical powercommissioning procedure of the FOADM station.

Set-up Diagram

Figure 3-12 Fiber connection of FOADM station E

West

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT

OUT

OUT IN

OUT

OUT TC

RCIN

IN

INRCOBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

MR2 MR2 MR2 MR2

LQM

L4G

L4G

L4G

LSX

LSX

LQM

L4G

INTC OUT IN

MO MO

MI MI

OUT

MI

OUT

MI

MO

IN

MO

DCM

East

DCM

IN

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-33

Page 92: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of the OAU at the receive end and DCM is the same as that of theOLA station. For details, refer to Step 10 through Step 12 in 3.12.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of OLA.

NOTE

The TDC and RDC interfaces of the OAU1 can access the DCM module. After input optical powercommissioning, set the gain to adjust the output optical power to the standard value. The tests of opticalpower, gain and OSNR are the same as what mentioned before.

Step 8 Test the output optical power of the D1 and D2 interfaces on the two MR2 boards of westrespectively after commissioning the west OBU1 at the receive end. Find out the optical interfacewith the largest output optical power.

Step 9 Add a fixed optical attenuator at the receive end of the OTU to adjust the input optical power ofthe IN interface of the OTU to meet the requirement.

NOTE

l The optimal range of the input power of the OTU: from higher than the sensitivity value by 3 dBm tolower than the overload value by 5 dBm.

l For the specific indexes of the OTU, refer to the Product Description.

Step 10 Insert the optical fiber into the IN interface on the WDM side of the OTU after the input opticalpower meets the requirements.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, D1, D2 and MO interfaces on the west MR2 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN interface to the D1 interface and to the D2 interface,and the passing through insertion loss from the IN interface to the MO interface on the first MR2of west.

Step 13 In the same way, test the optical power of each wavelength of the IN, D1, D2 and MO interfaceson the second MR2 of west. Calculate the drop insertion loss of the MR2.

Step 14 Test the input optical power of the east OBU1 at the transmit end. Adjust the VOA between theeast MR2 and the west MR2 at East-Transmit-to-West-Receive to adjust the mean input opticalpower of the pass-through wavelength of the IN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit endto the standard value.

Step 15 Test the optical power of the add wavelength of the east OTU with an optical power meter.

Step 16 Test the input optical power of the IN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit end with anoptical spectrum analyzer. Adjust the VOA of the OTU to adjust the input optical power of theadd wavelength of the IN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit end to the typical inputpower of single wavelength.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the MI, A1, A2 and OUT interfaces on the east MR2 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 93: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 18 Calculate the add insertion loss from the A1 interface and the A2 interface to OUT interface,and the pass-through insertion loss from the M1 interface to OUT interface of the east MR2.

Step 19 Test the optical power of single wavelength of each output wavelength on the OUT interface ofthe east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. Gain = output optical power of singlewavelength – input optical power of single wavelength. The gain flatness of each wavelengthshould be less than 2 dB.

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by the T2000.The difference between the value on the T2000 and the test value should be less than 2 dB.

Step 22 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RC and the OUTinterfaces on the east FIU, refer to the Step 13 and Step 14 in 3.12.3 Commissioning OpticalPower of OLA.

----End

3.12.6 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (ROAM+ROAM)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the ROAM+ROAM mode.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-35

Page 94: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Testing Diagram (Networking with ROAM+ROAM)

Figure 3-13 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with ROAM)

SC2

ROAM

OBU

D40

L4G

LQM

ROAM

D40

L4G

LQM

OBU

IN OUT

INOUT

OUTIN

INOUT

OBU1

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

DCM

FIU

FIUWest East

IN

OUT

OUT

IN

TM

TM1

RM1

RM

TM2 RM

TMRM2EXPO

EXPI

EXPOEXPI

M01

DM DMM01

Station E

RDC TDC

To D To F

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For details, refer to Step 12 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 8 Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OBU1 at the receive end to the maximumoutput power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of the IN interface of east OBU1at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Create the optical cross-connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and that from east OTU at the transmit end to theeast FIU on the T2000.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 95: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

For the details on how to create the optical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN interfaces of the west OTUs one by one.Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUsmeets the requirements.

NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in thedashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the opticalamplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD moduleis configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required;instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.

l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identifiedthrough the bar code information pasted on the front panel. For APD, there is a corresponding APDwarning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 10 After ensuring that the optical power meets the requirements, tightly insert the fiber into theinput interface on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN, DM and EXPO interfaces of the west ROAM with an opticalpower meter, and measure the input optical power at the IN interface and the single-wavelengthoutput optical power at the Dn interface of the D40.

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN interface to the DM interface and the pass-throughinsertion loss from the IN interface to the EXPO interface of the west ROAM and the insertionloss of the D40. The insertion loss of the D40 should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

NOTE

l For the ROAM board, Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuationvalue of the inside VOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, for the insertion loss of the ROAM board, refer to theProduct Description.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths of the ROAM.The method 1 is recommended.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.The ROAM automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength of east OTUand west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of the INinterface of the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of singlewavelength.

2. Method 2: Select Manualrelated to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA inside the ROAM board. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN interface of the east OBU1 at the transmit end isequal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the optical power of the EXPI, Mn and OUT interfaces of the east ROAM with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss from the Mn interface to the OUT interface and the pass-throughinsertion loss from the EXPI interface to the OUT interface of the east ROAM.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-37

Page 96: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the insideVOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, for the insertion loss of the ROAM board, refer to theProduct Description.

Step 16 Test the optical power of IN interface and single wavelength optical power of each outputwavelength of the OUT interface of east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength shouldbe less than 2 dB.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by the T2000.The difference between the values on the T2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB.

Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation of the RC and the OUTinterfaces of the east FIU, refer to Step 13 and Step 14 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

----End

3.12.7 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+WSM9)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+WSM9 mode.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 97: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+WSM9)

Figure 3-14 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+WSM9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUT IN OUT OUT TC

RCININ

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

WSM9INTC OUT

DCMM40

LSX

L4G

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

WSM9 WSD9

LQM

L4G

M40D40

AMDMWest East

LSX

L4G

LQM

L4G

LSX

L4G

LQM

L4G

WSD9

SC2

LSX

L4G

LQM

L4G

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelengthat the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-39

Page 98: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For details, refer to Step 12 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 8 Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OBU1 at the receive end to maximumoutput power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of the IN interface of east OBU1at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from the west FIU to the eastFIU and from east OTU at the transmit end to the east FIU on the T2000.

NOTE

For the details on how to create the optical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power of the west drop wavelength. The method 1 is recommended duringdeployment commissioning.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.The WSD9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the drop wavelength. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN interface of the west OTU at the receive end meetsthe requirements.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the drop wavelengthof the WSD9 board. This ensures that the average input power of the IN interface of thewest OTU at the receive end meets the requirements.

Step 10 Test the optical power of IN interface on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meetsthe requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input interface on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Adjust the optical power of the west pass-through wavelength. The method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.The WSD9 and the WSM9 automatically adjust the optical power of the west pass-throughwavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths of theIN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power ofsingle wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSD9 and WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power ofpass-through wavelengths of the IN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equalto the typical input power of single wavelength.

Step 12 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO interface of the west WSD9 board with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 99: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 13 Test the input and output optical power of D40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertionloss of the D40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN interface to the DMn interface and the pass-throughinsertion loss from the IN interface to the EXPO interface of the east WSD9.

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the insideVOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to orless than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the output power of the add wavelength of the east OTU. The method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.

The WSM9 automatically adjusts the optical power of the add wavelength of the east OTU.This ensures that the average input power of add wavelengths of the IN interface on theeast OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA corresponding to the pass-throughwavelength of the WSM9 boards. This ensures that the average input power of pass-throughwavelengths of the IN interface on the east OBU1 at the transmit end is equal to the typicalinput power of single wavelength.

NOTE

When the OTU adds/drops wavelengths directly or through the MRX, a VOA (in the solid frame)needs to be added before the optical amplifier at the transmit end. When the OTU adds wavelengthsthrough the M40, the VOA is not required.

Step 16 Test the input and output optical power of M40, and calculate the insertion loss of it. The insertionloss of the M40 board should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 17 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT interfaces of the WSM9 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 18 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn interface to the OUT interface andpass-through insertion loss from the EXPI interface to the OUT interface of the WSM9.

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of theinside VOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSM9 board should be equalto or less than 8 dB.

Step 19 Test the optical power of IN interface and single wavelength of each output wavelength of theOUT interface of the east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 20 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength shouldbe less than 2 dB.

Step 21 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by the T2000.The difference between the values on the T2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-41

Page 100: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 22 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation of the RC and the OUTinterfaces of the east FIU, refer to Step 13 and Step 14 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

----End

3.12.8 Commissioning Optical Power of ROADM (WSD9+RMU9)This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSD9+RMU9 mode.

PrerequisiteThe fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSD9+RMU9)

Figure 3-15 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSD9+RMU9)

FIU

FIUTo D

IN

OUT

To F

OUT

IN

Station E

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

OBU1OUT OUT

OUTIN

OUT

OUT TC

RCIN

IN

INRC

OBU1 OAU1

OBU1

TDCRDC

RMU9INTC OUT

DCM

LSR

L4G

D40

EXPO

EXPI

EXPI

EXPO

AM DM

RMU9 WSD9

LQM

L4G

D40

AMDM

West East

LSR

L4G

LQM

L4G

LSR

L4G

LQM

L4G

WSD9

SC2

LSR

L4G

LQM

L4G

TOA

ROA

TOA

ROA

MR4

MR4

IN

VOA Fix optical attenuator ODF side

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 101: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelengthat the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For details, refer to Step 12 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 8 Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OBU1 at the receive end to the maximumoutput power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of the IN interface of east OBU1at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Create the optical cross-connections from the west FIU to west OTU at the receive end, from the west FIU to the eastFIU on the T2000. Create the optical cross-connection from the east OTU that is connected withRMU9 directly at the transmit end to the east FIU.

NOTE

For the details on how to create the optical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

Step 9 Adjust the optical power of west drop wavelengths. The method 1 is recommended duringdeployment commissioning.

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.The WSD9 automatically adjust the optical power of the drop wavelength from the westOTU. This ensures that the input power of the IN interface of the west OTU at the receiveend is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Set the attenuation value of each drop channel of the WSD9 on the T2000. Ensurethat the input power of the IN interface of the west OTU is equal to the typical input powerof single wavelength.

Step 10 Test the optical power of IN interface on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meetsthe requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input interface on the WDM side of the OTU.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-43

Page 102: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 11 Test the input and output optical power of the west D40. Calculate the insertion loss of the D40board, which should be equal to or less than 6.5 dB.

Step 12 Adjust the optical power of west pass-through wavelengths. The method 1 is recommendedduring deployment commissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.

The WSD9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA of each pass-throughwavelength. This ensures that the input power of single pass-through wavelength of theOBU1 is equal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000. Testthe input power of east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set thecorresponding VOA of each pass-through wavelength of the west WSD9. This ensures thatthe input power of single pass-through wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typical inputpower of single wavelength.

Step 13 Test the output power of the IN/DMn/EXPO interface of the west WSD9 board with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 14 Calculate the drop insertion loss from IN interface to DM interface and the pass-through insertionloss from IN interface to EXPO interface of the WSD9 board.

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of the insideVOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, the insertion loss of the WSD9 board should be equal to orless than 8 dB.

Step 15 Adjust the optical power of add wavelengths of the east OTU board (the OTU is directlyconnected to the RMU9 board). The method 1 is recommended during deploymentcommissioning.1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.

The RMU9 automatically adjusts the corresponding VOA of each add wavelength of eacheast OTU. This ensures that the input power of single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equalto the typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OBU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manual related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000. Testthe input power of east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer. Manually set thecorresponding VOA of each add wavelength of the east OTU in the east RMU9. Thisensures that the input power of single add wavelength of the OBU1 is equal to the typicalinput power of single wavelength.

Step 16 As for wavelengths added through the RMU9 after the wavelengths are multiplexed by the MR4,perform the following substeps:1. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MR4 to

3 dB.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 103: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2. Set the VOA attenuation between the MR4 and OTU to the minimum.

3. Find out the smallest one among the input optical power values of wavelengths addedthrough the MR4 to the IN interface of the OBU1. Adjust the optical power of each of theother wavelengths to this smallest value to flatten the optical power.

4. Set the attenuation of the corresponding RMU9-imbedded VOA connected to the MR4 toobtain the typical input power of single wavelength added through the MR4.

Step 17 Test the input and output optical power of MR4, and calculate the insertion loss of it. Theinsertion loss of the MR4 board should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 18 Test the optical power of the EXPI, AMn and OUT interfaces of the RMU9 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 19 Calculate each add wavelength insertion loss from the AMn interface to the OUT interface andpass-through insertion loss from the EXPI interface to the OUT interface of the RMU9.

NOTE

l Insertion loss = Insertion loss when the inside VOA of the board is zero + Attenuation value of theinside VOA of the board

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, for the insertion loss of the RMU9 board, refer to theProduct Description.

Step 20 Test the optical power of IN interface and single wavelength of each output wavelength of theOUT interface of the east OBU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 21 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OBU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength shouldbe less than 2 dB.

Step 22 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OBU1 by the T2000.The difference between the values on the T2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB.

Step 23 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation of the RC and the OUTinterfaces of the east FIU, refer to Step 13 and Step 14 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

----End

3.12.9 Commissioning the Optical Power of the ROADM (WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes how to commission the optical power of a west-to-east signal flow in theROADM station in the WSMD4+WSMD4 mode.

Prerequisitel The fiber connection and NE commissioning must be complete.

l The optical power commissioning of station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, optical power meter, signal analyzer, optical fiber, fixed opticalattenuator, VOA

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-45

Page 104: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Testing Diagram (Networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the WSMD4 board. In this section, thenetworking diagram for two-dimensional grooming are used as an example for illustration. Thenetworking of multi-dimensional grooming can be considered as a network with multiplenetworks providing two-dimensional grooming.

Figure 3-16 Fiber connection of ROADM station E (networking with WSMD4+WSMD4)

FIU

FIU

OUT

OUT IN

IN

OBU1

IN OUT

WSMD4West

OBU1INOUT

East

D40

WSMD4

D40M40 M40

OUT

IN

IN

OUT

Station E

SC2RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

DM4

DM4

AM4

AM4

AM1DM1 AM1 DM1

OBU1 OAU1

L4G

L4G

LSX

LSX

OB

U

OB

U

VOA Fixed optical attenuator ODF side

NOTE

l In the diagram, the AM2/DM2 and AM3/DM3 optical interfaces of the WSMD4 board are not shown.The two pairs of interfaces are used for signal grooming in other direction, respectively.

l The single-wavelength signals are transmitted directly to the AMn optical interface by the OTU board.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the fiber connection of each board according to fiber connection diagram. The opticalfiber of the input interface on the OTU needs to be loosely inserted.

Step 2 The line attenuation test is the same as that of the OLA station. Refer to Step 1 in 3.12.3Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 3 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TM interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 2 and Step 3 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 105: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 4 For optical power commissioning of the SC2, refer to Step 4 and Step 5 in 3.12.3 CommissioningOptical Power of OLA.

Step 5 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the RM and OUT interfaceon the east FIU, refer to Step 6 and Step 7 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 6 For the optical power commissioning and insertion loss calculation of the IN and TC interfaceon the west FIU, refer to Step 8 and Step 9 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA.

Step 7 The commissioning method of west-receive OBU1 at the receive end is the same as that of theOLA station. For specific procedures, refer to Step 12 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

Step 8 Set the optical power of the OUT interface of the west OBU1 at the receive end to maximumoutput power of single wavelength. Set the rated optical power of the IN interface of east OBU1at the transmit end to the typical input power of single wavelength. Create Single-Station OpticalCross-Connection from the west FIU to the east FIU and that from east OTU at the transmit endto the east FIU on the T2000.

NOTE

The details to create the optical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

Step 9 Connect the optical power meter to the fiber of IN interfaces of the west OTUs one by one.Configure the fixed optical attenuator to ensure that the input optical power of the west OTUsmeets the requirements.

NOTE

l If a PIN module is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA in thedashed frame need to be configured. If the OAU101, OAU103 or OBU103 is configured as the opticalamplifier at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required.

l If the OBU101 or OBU104 is configured as the optical amplifier at the receive end and an APD moduleis configured on the WDM side of the OTU at the receive end, the OBU and VOA are not required;instead, a 10 dB fixed optical attenuator needs to be configured.

l The previous commissioning method is for the OTU board with PIN photodiode. For the OTU withAPD, a 10 dB fixed attenuator needs to be configured.

l There are two types of optical receive modules: PIN and APD. The specific type can be identifiedthrough the bar code information pasted on the front panel. For APD, there is a corresponding APDwarning identifier on the panel of the board.

Step 10 Test the optical power of IN interface on the OTU. After ensuring that the optical power meetsthe requirements, tightly insert the fiber into the input interface on the WDM side of the OTU.

Step 11 Test the optical power of the IN and DMn interfaces of the west WSMD4 with an optical powermeter. And test the output optical power of the D40.

Step 12 Calculate the drop insertion loss from the IN interface to the DMn interfaces of the west WSMD4and the insertion loss of the D40. The insertion loss of the D40 should be equal to or less than6.5 dB.

NOTE

l For the WSMD4 board, insertion loss = insertion loss when the inside attenuation is zero + theattenuation value of the inside VOA of the board.

l When the attenuation of the inside VOA is zero, for the insertion loss of the WSMD4 board, refer tothe Product Description.

Step 13 Adjust the optical power of the add wavelengths and pass-through wavelengths of the WSMD4.The method 2 is recommended. Method 2 is recommended during deployment commissioning.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-47

Page 106: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1. Method 1: Select Automatic related to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.The WSMD4 automatically adjust the optical power of the add wavelength of the east OTUand the west pass-through wavelength. This ensures that the average input power of pass-through wavelengths of the IN interface on the east OAU1 at the transmit end is equal tothe typical input power of single wavelength.

NOTE

After the optical power is automatically adjusted, query the actual optical power at the IN opticalinterface on the OAU1. If the actual power differs slightly from the power as required, use the secondmethod to fine tune the power.

2. Method 2: Select Manualrelated to the optical cross-connection mode on the T2000.Manually adjust the attenuation value of each VOA inside the WSMD4 board. This ensuresthat the average input power of the IN interface of the east OAU1 at the transmit end isequal to the typical input power of single wavelength.

Step 14 Test the output optical power of the AMn and OUT interfaces of the east WSMD4 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 15 Calculate the add insertion loss and the pass-through insertion loss from the AMn interface tothe OUT interface of the east WSMD4.

Step 16 Test the single wavelength optical power of IN interface and single wavelength optical powerof each output wavelength of the OUT interface of east OAU1 with an optical spectrum analyzer.

Step 17 Calculate the gain of each wavelength of the OAU1. The gain flatness of each wavelength shouldbe less than 2 dB.

Step 18 Query the input and output optical power of the multiplexed signal of the OAU1 by the T2000.The difference between the values on the T2000 and the test values should be less than 2 dB.

Step 19 For the optical power commissioning of insertion loss calculation of the RC and the OUTinterfaces of the east FIU, refer to Step 13 and Step 14 in 3.12.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

----End

3.13 Example of Commissioning Optical Power Based on40Gbit/s Single-Wavelength System

This section describes how to commission the single-channel 40G (hereinafter referred to as40G) OTM and OLA, stations.

CAUTIONEnsure that the optical interfaces and fibers involved in the commissioning are clean. Otherwise,the system performance will be affected.

NOTEWhen commissioning the optical power, ensure that all channels configured for the project access servicesignals, or that the WDM side is forced to emit light. Hence, all the OTU can emit light normally. Then,start the commissioning station by station.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 107: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTEThe optical power queried on the T2000 is general optical power. The difference between the value andthe value tested by instruments should be within 1 dB.

3.13.1 Description of the ExampleThe commissioning of the 40G system imposes higher requirements, compared with thecommissioning of low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be commissioned is along haul 40G link.

3.13.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit EndThis section considers direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the opticalpower at the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the totaltransmit optical power meets the specification requirement and the optical power flatness ofevery wavelength is realized.

3.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLAIn the case of the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms ofoptical power commissioning.

3.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive EndThe commissioning rule of the OTM station is that "commission the optical power at the transmitend based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM station, youneed to commission only the total input optical power. Then, adjust the attenuation of everywavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receiveend.

3.13.1 Description of the ExampleThe commissioning of the 40G system imposes higher requirements, compared with thecommissioning of low-rate service line. In this example, the system to be commissioned is along haul 40G link.

Networking Diagram

Figure 3-17shows the network topology of Project H. In a chain network, optical networkelements (ONEs) A, B, C and D are the stations installed with the OptiX OSN 6800. ONE Aand ONE D are configured as OTM stations. ONE B and ONE C are two OLA stations. Thereare several OLA stations between ONE B and ONE C. 10-channel 40G services are transmittedbetween ONEs A and D.

Figure 3-17 shows the span loss and distance between NEs. G.655 fiber is used as the line opticalfiber.

Figure 3-17 Service requirement matrix in Project H

A C DBOLA80 km/22dB 76 km/20.9dB

:OLA:OTM

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-49

Page 108: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Wavelength Allocation DiagramFigure 3-18 shows the wavelength allocation diagram of Project H. The solid line representsthe working channel and the dashed line represents the protection channel.

Figure 3-18 Wavelength allocation diagram of Project H

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

LSXL 192.80THz

LSXL 196.00THzLSXL 192.90THz

A D

LSXL 192.10THz

LSXL 192.20THz

LSXL 192.30THz

LSXL 192.40THz

LSXL 192.50THz

LSXL 192.60THz

LSXL 192.70THz

STM-256

LSXL 192.80THzLSXL 192.90THz

LSXL 196.00THzSTM-256STM-256

STM-256STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

STM-256

Optical Amplifier Configuration DiagramFigure 3-19 shows the configuration of the optical amplifier on each station in Project H.

Figure 3-19 Optical amplifier configuration diagram of Project H

至D40

来自V40

OBU103

DCM

OAU103

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

OBU103

OAU103from

M40

toD40

DCM

A C D

80 km22dB

76 km20.9dB

OAU103

DCM

DCM

OAU103

B

fromM40

toD40

OLA

NE board_caps ConfigurationNOTE

At the OTM station, the WDM-side optical module supports DRZ 100 GHz. The OAU1 type isTN11OAU103, and the OBU1 type is TN11OBU103.

Figure 3-20shows the board configuration of ONE A and ONE D. The board configurations ofONEs B and C are the same as the board of the other OLAs, as shown in Figure 3-21

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 109: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-20 Board_caps Configuration of ONE A and ONE D (OTM)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

OBU1

SC1

PIUPIUAUX

SCC

FIU

OBU1

MR2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

M40

D40

LSXL

LSXL

MCA

DCM

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

SCC

FIU

PIUPIUAUX

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

PDU PDU

NOTEThe LSXL occupies four slots.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-51

Page 110: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-21 Board_caps Configuration of ONEs B and C (OLA)

SCC

FIU

OAU1

SC2

PIUPIUAUX

DCM

OAU1

FIU

PDU

Commissioning RulesThe following rules must be observed when you commission the 40G system:

l In the case of the commissioning of the 40G system, an optical spectrum analyzer must beused in the commissioning to ensure that the optical power is commissioned precisely.

l The objective of 40G system commissioning is to commission the receive OSNR flatnessof a multiplex section to ±1 dB and to make sure that the optical power flatness at eachstation is less than ±1.5dB.

l During the equalization of the system optical power, the actual incident optical power ofevery section cannot deviate from the typical incident optical power over ±2 dB regardlessof the fiber type. Otherwise, the system performance degrades quickly and the BER beforeFEC increases rapidly.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 111: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l The optical power at the IN optical interface on the 40 OTU board_caps should be withinthe range from –8 dBm to –3 dBm.

l The objective of the system commissioning is to ensure the optical power flatness and theOSNR flatness. When the difference between the OSNR flatness and optical power flatnessis small, the system OSNR flatness can be obtained by maintaining the optical powerflatness.

l In the case of 40G system commissioning, adjust the optical power of each wavelength atthe transmit end to make it flat. Then, adjust the optical power difference between eachwavelength at each two equilibrium stations (stations that balance the optical power,including ROADM, back-to-back OADM, and back-to-back OTM ) to a value not morethan 0.5 dB. If the spacing between two equilibrium stations is less than or equal to fourspans, you only need to adjust the output optical power difference of equilibrium stationsat the transmit end to 0.5 dB.

l When commissioning the 40G ODB 80-channel system, test the signal power and OSNRof the even wavelengths by shutting down the odd wavelengths and then test the signalpower and OSNR of the odd wavelengths by shutting down the even wavelengths.

l When the 10G signal and the 40G signal are mixed in transmission, the generalcommissioning method is same as that for 40G system commissioning. When the 10Gsignal is adjacent to the 40G signal, however, make sure that the optical power of the 10Gsignal is not more than nominal power of a single wavelength. Under the condition that the10G signal is stable for a long time, commission the power of the 10G signal to a value 1dB less than the power of the adjacent 40G signal.

l In the mixed spectrum of the 40G signal and the 10G signal, the spectrum of 40G signal iswider and its amplitude is lower than that of the 10G signal. Actually, the power of the 10Gsignal, however, is equal to the power of the 40G signal. Thus, measure optical power ofthe 40G wavelength and the 10G wavelength accurately, Figure 3-22 shows the mixedoptical spectrum.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-53

Page 112: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 3-22 Mixed optical spectrum of 40G signals and 10G signals

40G signals

10G signals

TIPWhen the system has more than 20 spans, the noise signal of the short wavelengths increases and there isa great difference between OSNR flatness and optical power flatness. Thus, during the extra long-haul 40Gtransmission, avoid using short wavelengths. If short wavelengths must be used, you need to take intoaccount the OSNR limits of the short wavelengths when planning the network.

Commissioning Procedure

Table 3-1 Commissioning stations reference list

Station Commissioning Method and Fiber Connection Diagram

A Refer to 3.13.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit End

B,C Refer to 3.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLA

D Refer to 3.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End

For the commissioning method of each station in project H and the fiber connection diagram ofeach station, refer to Table 3-1. The commissioning is performed in two directions:

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 113: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Direction 1:A→B→C→D

Direction 2:D→C→B→A

Because the commissioning in the two directions are performed in a similar way, only thecommissioning in direction 1 is described.

CAUTIONBefore the OptiX OSN 6800 is connected to the line fiber in each station, you must:l Test the span loss to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement of the

engineering design.l Test the transmission distance of the line signals to ensure the value is in accordance with

the requirement of the engineering design.l Check the type of the line fiber to ensure the value is in accordance with the requirement

of the engineering design.If any one of the above conditions is not met, the system commissioning will be affected. Thus,when the above conditions are not met, give feedback to the construction party who is in chargeto solve the problem.

NOTE

The fibers between the FIU and ODF subrack, the fibers between the LSXL and client equipment and thefibers between cabinets are all external fibers that should be routed on site.

3.13.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit EndThis section considers direction 1 as an example to describe how to commission the opticalpower at the transmit end of the OTM. The objective of commissioning is to ensure that the totaltransmit optical power meets the specification requirement and the optical power flatness ofevery wavelength is realized.

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

The fiber connections must be correct.

All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, to make the OTUemits light normally.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Flange, Fixed optical attenuator,Variable optical attenuator

Background InformationIn this example, the specifications of the hardware are as follows:l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.

l At the OTM station, the WDM-side optical module supports DRZ 100 GHz.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-55

Page 114: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

l The OAU1 type is TN11OAU103 and the OBU1 type is TN11OBU103.

NOTEWhen the 40G ODB system is used, a dual-module ITL board_caps must be configured at the transmit andreceive ends. If certain OADM stations add/drop ODB wavelengths (wavelengths with 100 GHz channelspacing), a dual-module ITL board_caps also must be used at the transmit and receive ends. In the case of theROADM stations with 50 GHz channel spacing, no ITL board_caps is required because the 50 GHz WSS moduleprovides the 50 GHz filter function.

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 3-23 Fiber connection diagram of OTM station A

Station A

ODFFixed opticalattenuator

Variable opticalattenuator

M40

OBU1

FIU

SC1

D40

OUT OUT

OUT TC

RCIN OUT

ININ

RMTM

TMRM

OAU1

TDCRDC

To B

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

Rx

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

D31

D32

D40

Tx

M31

M32

M40

DCM

From B

Procedure

Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagramand if the fiber on each board is inserted properly. If not, correct the error immediately.

Step 2 Access real service signals on the client sides of all OTU board_caps.

Step 3 Obtain the information on the optical module of the OTU by observing the bar code on the frontpanel or the board manufacturing information.

Step 4 Ask the equipment engineer of the customer to provide the transmitting optical power and theoptical module type of the equipment. Compare the optical power with the receiving opticalpower on the client side of the OTU to determine if the fixed attenuator should be adjusted.Record the receiving optical power on the client side of the OTU.

In the case of Project H, the receiving optical power of the client-side OTU (the input opticalpower of the client-side LSXL interfaces) must be within the range from –5 dBm to +3 dBm(LSXL).

Step 5 Check whether the WDM-side OUT interfaces on all OTUs emit lights or not. If not,

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 115: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l Check whether the accessed SDH/SONET services are normal or not. If not, clear the faultfirst.

l Check whether the OTU having no services emits light and whether the laser on the OTUis open or not. If not, refer to 3.2.1 Forcing the OTU Board to Emit Light to force theOTU to emit light and to open the laser.

Step 6 Test the output optical power of the OUT interface on the OTU. In the case of LSXL, the valuemust be within the range from 0 dBm to –5 dBm and is –3 dBm normally.

Step 7 Test the receiving optical power of the Mn interface of the M40 and record the value.

NOTE

Mn refers to the interfaces M31–M40 that are used in this example.

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power of the OUT interface on the OTU isgreater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.

Step 8 Pre-adjust the attenuation of the Variable optical attenuator attached to the M40 to +3 dB tofacilitate the fine tuning of the attenuation in the subsequent steps.

Step 9 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the OUT optical interface on the M40 by using a fiberjumper. Scan the M40 to output multiplexed signals and record the optical power of everywavelength and the multiplexed optical power. Then, calculate the wavelength insertion loss ofthe M40 to check whether the wavelength insertion loss of the M40 meets the specificationrequirement.

NOTE

When calculating the wavelength insertion loss of the M40, note that the attenuation of the M40 is pre-adjusted to +3 dB.

If the detected output optical power is abnormal, check whether optical interfaces M31–M40 are connectedimproperly.

Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical interface on the OBU1 toan optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the IN opticalinterface on the OBU to ensure that the total input optical power of the OBU is about –9 dBm.

NOTE

According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensurethat the total optical power meets the specification requirement . Then, ensure the optical power flatnessof every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets standards. The total input opticalpower is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength optical power. The calculation formula is asfollows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength input optical power + 10logN (N equals10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -19dBm, the input total optical power is -9dBm.

Step 11 Test the output optical power at the OUT optical interface on the OBU1, and ensure that thetotal output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths reaches about +14 dBm.

NOTE

The fixed gain of the TN11OBU103 is 23 dB. In the case, the input optical power of the IN interface onthe OBU1 is -9dBm, so the output optical power of the OUT interface is + 14dBm.

NOTEThe nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm, and the maximal single-wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.

You can obtain the total output optical power by using the following formula: Total output optical power =Single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-57

Page 116: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 12 Connect the OUT optical interface on the OBU1 to the optical spectrum analyzer to query theoptical power of every wavelength. Adjust the wavelength attenuation of the Variable opticalattenuator attached to the M40 so that the output optical power flatness is about 0.5 dB.

Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power at the RC interface of the FIU board_capsand record the test result.

NOTE

If the difference between the optical power at the RC interface and the optical power at the OUT interfaceon the OBU1 is greater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fibers.

Step 14 Test the optical power of the OUT interface on the FIU (in the case of disconnecting the fiberto the RM interface), and determine the RC-OUT insertion loss.

RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical powerof the OUT on the FIU

Step 15 Test the output optical power of the TM interface on the SC1 with an optical power meter, andthen test the input optical power of the RM interface on the FIU. If the difference between thetwo values is more than 1 dB, check the routing and the cleanness of the optical fibers.

Step 16 Test the output optical power of the OUT interface on the FIU with an optical power meter (inthe case of disconnecting the fiber to the RC interface). Calculate the insertion loss from RM toOUT interface of the FIU. The insertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

----End

3.13.3 Commissioning Optical Power of OLAIn the case of the OLA station, you need to commission only the total optical power in terms ofoptical power commissioning.

Prerequisite

You must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

The fiber connections must be correct.

All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, to make the OTUemits light normally.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

Optical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Fiber jumper, Signal analyzer, Flange, Fixedoptical attenuator, Variable optical attenuator

Background InformationIn this example, the specifications of the hardware are as follows:

l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.

l At the OTM station, the WDM-side optical module supports DRZ 100 GHz.

l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

l The OAU1 type is TN11OAU103.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 117: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 3-24 Fiber connection diagram of OLA station B

SC2FIU

From A

IN

OUT

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM RMTM2

TMRM2

TC

RC

FIU

To C

OUT

IN

Station B

OAU1IN OUT

DCMTDC RDC

OAU1 INOUT

DCMTDCRDC

TC

ODFFixed opticalattenuator

Variable opticalattenuator

West East

Procedure

Step 1 Test the optical power of the IN interface on the west FIU with an optical power meter. Comparethe value with optical power of the OUT interface on the east FIU of station A to calculate theline attenuation between station A and station B on the line side. If the actual line attenuation islarger than the line attenuation designed in networking, check the line attenuation to determinewhether the cable attenuation is overlarge or the fiber routing is faulty. If the cables are faulty,clear the fault accordingly.

Step 2 Test the input optical power of the IN interface and the output optical power of the TM interfaceon the west FIU at 1510nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical power valuesin the commissioning record.

Step 3 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN interface to the TM interface of the west FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

Step 4 Test the input optical power of the RM1 interface with an optical spectrum analyzer. Add aproper attenuator to make the input power less than –3dB.

Step 5 Test the output optical power of the TM2 interface of the SC2 with an optical spectrum analyzer.Record the input optical power of the RM1 interface and the output optical power of the TM2interface in the commissioning record.

Step 6 Test the input optical power of the RM interface and the output optical power of the OUTinterface on the east FIU at 1510nm with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the optical powervalues in the commissioning record.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss from the RM interface to the OUT interface on the east FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.5 dB.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-59

Page 118: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 8 Test the input optical power of the IN interface and the output optical power of the TC interfaceon the west FIU at a certain wavelength with an optical spectrum analyzer. Record the opticalpower values in the commissioning record.

Step 9 Calculate the insertion loss from the IN interface to the TC interface on the west FIU. Theinsertion loss should be equal to or less than 1.0 dB.

Step 10 Connect the fiber jumper that needs to be connected to the IN optical interface on the west OAU1to an optical power meter. Adjust the attenuation of the optical attenuator attached to the INoptical interface on the OAU1 to ensure that the total input optical power of the OAU1 is about–10 dBm.

NOTE

According to the commissioning rules, commission the total input optical power of the signals to ensurethat the total input optical power meets the specification requirement. Then, ensure the optical powerflatness of every wavelength so that the single-wavelength optical power meets the specificationrequirement. The total input optical power is calculated based on the nominal single-wavelength opticalpower. The calculation formula is as follows: Total input optical power = Nominal single-wavelength inputoptical power + 10logN (N equals 10). If the nominal single-wavelength input optical power is -20 dBm,the input total optical power is -10 dBm.

Step 11 Query the output optical power at the OUT optical interface on the west OAU1, and then adjustthe gain of the OAU1 on the T2000 to ensure that the total output optical power of the multiplexedwavelengths reaches about +14 dBm.

NOTEThe nominal single-wavelength input optical power of the G.655 fiber is +4 dBm. and the maximal single-wavelength input optical power should be not more than +5.5 dBm.

The total output optical power of the multiplexed wavelengths can be obtained by using the following formula:Total output optical power = Nominal single-wavelength output optical power + 10logN (N equals 10).

Step 12 Test the input and output optical power of the DCM and calculate the DCM insertion loss.

DCM insertion loss = DCM input optical power – DCM output optical power

Step 13 Use an optical power meter to test the optical power of the RC interface on the FIU and recordthe value.

NOTE

If the difference between the optical power and the optical power of the OUT interface on the OAU isgreater than 1 dB, check the fiber routing and clean the fiber.

Step 14 Test the optical power of the OUT interface on the east FIU (in the case of disconnecting thefiber to the RM interface) and calculate the RC-OUT insertion loss.

RC-OUT insertion loss on the FIU = Input optical power of the RC on the FIU – Optical powerof the OUT on the FIU

----End

3.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive EndThe commissioning rule of the OTM station is that "commission the optical power at the transmitend based on the optical power at the receive end". At the receive end of the OTM station, youneed to commission only the total input optical power. Then, adjust the attenuation of everywavelength of the M40 at the transmit end according to the optical power flatness at the receiveend.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 119: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

PrerequisiteYou must be an NM user with "NE and network operator" authority or higher.

The fiber connections must be correct.

All channels must be accessed with services or must be forced to emit light, to make the OTUemits light normally.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsOptical spectrum analyzer, Optical power meter, Signal analyzer, Fiber jumper, Flange, Fixedoptical attenuator, Variable optical attenuator

Background InformationIn this example, the specifications of the hardware are as follows:l G.655 fiber is used as the line optical fiber.

l At the OTM station, the WDM-side optical module supports DRZ 100 GHz.

l In the 40x40G system, ten wavelengths are added.

l The OAU1 type is TN11OAU103. The OBU1 type is TN11OBU103.

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 3-25 Fiber connection diagram of OTM station D

Station D

ODFFixed opticalattenuator

Variable opticalattenuator

SC1

D40

FIU

M40OUT IN

OUT

IN

OUT

TC OUT IN

RC

RM1

TM1RM

TM

OBU1To C

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

TxD31

D32

D40

LSXL

LSXL

LSXL

RxM31

M32

M40

OAU1

TDC RDCDCM

From C

Procedure

Step 1 Check if the fiber connection between boards is correct based on the fiber connection diagramand if the fiber on each board is well inserted. If not, correct the error immediately.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-61

Page 120: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 2 Test the optical power of the FIU and the SC1 by referring to 3.13.2 Commissioning OpticalPower of OTM Transmit End.

Step 3 Perform the commissioning on the OAU1 by referring to 3.13.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA.

Step 4 Connect the fiber jumper which is to be inserted into the IN interface of the D40 to opticalspectrum analyzer. Scan the multiplexed signal and record the optical power of each channel.

Step 5 Connect the optical spectrum analyzer to the fiber jumper of the IN interface on the west D40to scan the multiplexed signal. Record the input optical power of each wavelength.

Step 6 Test the output optical power of each wavelength of the Dn interface on the D40 with an opticalspectrum analyzer.

Step 7 Calculate the insertion loss of each wavelength of the D40. The insertion loss must be less than8 dB, and the maximum difference between the insertion loss values of each wavelength of theD40 must be less than 2.0 dB.

Step 8 Test the input and output optical power of the DCM and then obtain the insertion loss of theDCM by using the following formula:

Insertion loss of the DCM = Input optical power of the DCM – Output optical power of theDCM.

Step 9 Test the input optical power of the IN interface on the WDM side of the OTU. Check whetherthe optical power of the IN interface on the OTU is within the standard range.

NOTE

The input optical power on the WDM side of the LSXL board must be within the range from -14 dBm to-2 dBm. In practical applications, you should adjust the input optical power to a higher level. The rangefrom -8 dBm to -3 dBm is recommended. If the test results do not meet the specification requirement, youneed to add, replace, or remove a/the fixed optical attenuator according to the test results so that the receiveoptical power of the OTU board is within the normal range.

Step 10 Securely insert the optical fiber into the IN interface of the OTU after the input optical powermeets the requirements.

Step 11 Test the output optical power on the client side of the OTU and the optical power of the ODF.Compare the two values to check whether the fiber jumper on the client side is correctlyconnected. The fiber attenuation must be less than 1 dB.

Step 12 Query the input and output optical power of each OTU by the T2000. The difference betweenthe values on the T2000 and the test values must be less than 2.0 dB. The system OSNR flatnessmust be around ±1 dB after the commissioning. If the optical power equalization of everywavelength is adjusted normal, test the OSNR on the optical spectrum analyzer. The OSNRtested should be meet the specification of the equipment. And the OSNR flatness of everywavelength should be ensured. In addition, check whether the TDCM is adjusted to the optimalvalue and whether the bit error rate conforms to the expected value.

Step 13 If the client equipment accessed is new, test the 24-hour network-wide bit errors of the clientequipment. If the client equipment is not connected or not used, loop back the TX and RXinterfaces on the client sides of all OTU of station C at the ODF side. In addition, a fixed opticalattenuator needs to be added before the RX interface.

3 Commissioning Optical PowerOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

3-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 121: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

3.13.2 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Transmit End, 3.13.3 Commissioning Optical Powerof OLA and 3.13.4 Commissioning Optical Power of OTM Receive End shows the commissioningprocess for the optical multiplex section. The commissioning of the multiplex sections at OTM and OLAstations is similar.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Optical Power

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

3-63

Page 122: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 123: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4 Commissioning Network

About This Chapter

Perform the network commissioning after each node and the optical power of the network arecommissioned. This chapter introduces the network commissioning of the OptiX OSN 6800through case study.

Network commissioning serves to:

l Connect all the NEs in a network in line with the engineering design scheme.

l Test the services of the network to verify the configuration.

l Test the functions of the network, such as the orderwire and protection switching.

l Test quality of the long-term communication in the network through alarms andperformance events.

4.1 Checking Network-Wide Software VersionAfter you query the software version, you obtain the state version information of each on theNE.

4.2 Testing Protection SwitchingThis section describes how to test the protection switch function.

4.3 Testing System FeaturesThe system features are IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.

4.4 Testing Bit ErrorsThe network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You canperform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments. Theremust be no bit error in consecutive 24 hours.

4.5 Testing Orderwire FunctionsOrderwire function test consists of addressing call test and conference call test.

4.6 Backing Up NE DatabaseAfter the configuration data is delivered, it is required to backup the NE database. The NEdatabase can ensure that the SCC restores to normal operation automatically upon data loss orpower failure.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-1

Page 124: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4.1 Checking Network-Wide Software VersionAfter you query the software version, you obtain the state version information of each on theNE.

PrerequisiteThe T2000 and the client side must be started up.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the client side on the T2000, and choose Report > Board Information Report fromthe main menu.

Step 2 Click the from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane to update the Navigator Tree. Thenselect the desired NE from the Navigator Tree, and click the double-right-arrow button.

Step 3 Click Query. If a message indicating a successful operation is displayed in the prompt OperationResult dialog box, the operation is successful.

Step 4 Click Close. The status and version information of each of the NE are displayed in the interface.

Step 5 Record the versions of the BIOS, software, FPGA and PCB.

Step 6 The versions of each NE and each should be the same because of the packet loading. If theversions are different, please feed back to the regional office of Huawei Technologies Co. Ltdin time.

----End

4.2 Testing Protection SwitchingThis section describes how to test the protection switch function.

OptiX OSN 6800 supports the following protection modes:

l Optical line protection

l Intra-board 1+1 protection

l Client 1+1 protection

l SW SNCP protection

l ODUk SNCP protection

l VLAN SNCP protection

l OWSP protection

l ODUk SPRing protection

l Board_level protection

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 125: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l Tributary SNCP Protection

l Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection

l Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection

l DLAG Protection

For the working principle of each protection mode and the operating process, refer to the FeatureDescription.

The testing methods of different protection switching are similar. The only difference lies in thatthe navigation path on the T2000 is different.

4.2.1 Testing the Optical Line Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two OTM stations to describe the test procedure ofthe optical line protection switching.

4.2.2 Testing the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section takes a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is realized by using the OLP.

4.2.3 Testing Client 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section takes a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the client 1+1 protection switching that is realized by using the OLP.

4.2.4 Testing SW SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the SW SNCP protection switching.

4.2.5 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and theline board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure of the ODUk SNCPprotection switching.

4.2.6 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the VLAN SNCP protection switching.

4.2.7 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection SwitchingThis topic considers a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure of the tributarySNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributaryboard and the line board are jointly used

4.2.8 Testing Board-Level Protection SwitchingThe board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extendedmode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section takes the extended board-level protection by using two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure of theboard-level protection switching.

4.2.9 Testing the Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCP Protection SwitchingThis topic describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching. Inthis topic, the service between station A and station C in a ring that consists of three stations isconsidered as an example.

4.2.10 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection SwitchingThis topic describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching. Inthis topic, the service between station A and station C is considered as an example.

4.2.11 Testing DLAG Protection Switching

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-3

Page 126: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

This topic describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is triggeredby the line failure after the fiber is removed.

4.2.12 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent ones of which bearservices, as an example to describe the test procedure of the ODUk SPRing protection switching.

4.2.13 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection SwitchingOptiX OSN 6800 supports OWSP (optical wavelength shared protection) protection. Thissection describes the testing procedure for the OWSP protection. In this section, two adjacentstations with services in a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example for illustration.

4.2.1 Testing the Optical Line Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two OTM stations to describe the test procedure ofthe optical line protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe optical line protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing optical line protection switching is shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Testing the optical line protection

OLPFIU

TI

RO

OLP FIU

RO

TI

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

RI1

TO1

RI2

TO2

Tx

RxSignal

analyzer OTU1

OTUn

OADM

OTU1

OTUn

OADM

Station A Station B

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 127: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-1.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

The related parameters of the OLP are configured on the T2000. For configurationprocedure, refer to the Creating Optical Line Protection in the Feature Description.

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the Station A in the Main Topology,and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and select NE Explorer todisplay the NE Explorer dialog box.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree and choose Configuration > PortProtection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane.

5. Check the channel status of the optical line protection. The Working Channel is 1(RI1/TO1) and the Protection Channel is 2(RI2/TO2). The Working ChannelStatus and the Protection Channel Status is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the optical line protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the RI1 interface of the OLP boardin Station A to perform the switching.

– Method 2: forced switching. On the T2000, log in to station A. Right-click thedesired protection group , and select Force to Protection Channel to perform theswitching.

2. Query the channel states of the optical line protection after the switching in station A.– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is 1(RI1/TO1), and Protection

Channel is 2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF; Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is 1(RI1/TO1), and ProtectionChannel is 2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The OLP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available, and the switching time should be less than 50 ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protectiongroup and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the short-cut menu. After that,right-click the same protection group again and then choose Clear from the short-cut menu.

– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the ProtectionGroup, and select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-5

Page 128: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4.2.2 Testing the Intra-Board 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section takes a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the intra-board 1+1 protection switching that is realized by using the OLP.

PrerequisiteThe intra-board 1+1 protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing intra-board 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 Testing intra-board 1+1 protection switching

OLP

TO1

TO2

RI1

RI2

OLP

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

TI

RO

RO OTU

TI

Tx

RxOTU

Signalanalyzer

Tx

Rx

Station A Station B

OADM

OADM

OADM

OADM

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-2.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology, and the statusfigure of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 129: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > Port Protection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane. The switching status of intra-board protection and channel statusshould be Normal.

5. Check the channel status of the intra-board 1+1 protection. The Working Channel is1(RI1/TO1) and the Protection Channel is 2(RI2/TO2). The Working ChannelStatus and the Protection Channel Status is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the intra-board protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the TI1 interface of the OLP boardin Station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 4-2.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the protection group user interface of station A,right-click the desired protection group, and select Force to ProtectionChannel to perform the switching.

2. Query the channel states of the intra-board 1+1 protection in station A.– When remove the fiber of the main optical channel, Working Channel is 1(RI1/

TO1), and Protection Channel is 2(RI2/TO2).Working Channel Status is SF,Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– When selecting Force to Protection Channel, Working Channel is 1 (RI1/TO1), and Protection Channel is 2 (RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status andthe Protection Channel Status is Normal. Switching Status is Force toProtection Channel.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The INTRA_OTU_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available, no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protectiongroup and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the short-cut menu. After that,right-click the same protection group again and then choose Clear from the short-cut menu.

– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the ProtectionGroup, and select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.

----End

4.2.3 Testing Client 1+1 Protection SwitchingThis section takes a network formed by two OTM stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the client 1+1 protection switching that is realized by using the OLP.

PrerequisiteThe client 1+1 protection must be configured.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-7

Page 130: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing client 1+1 protection switching is shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Testing the client 1+1 protection

FIU

FIU

FIU

FIU

OTU1

OTU2

OLP

TO1

RI1

TO2

RI2

TI

RO

RI1

TO1

RI2

TO2

OTU3

OTU4

OLP

Station A Station B

RO

TI

Signalanalyzer

OADM

OADM

OADM

OADM

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the TI and RO interfaces on the client side of the OLP board through twofixed optical attenuators.

2. In station B, connect the RO interface to the TI interface on the client side of the OLPboard through a fixed optical attenuator, to realize the loopback on the client side, asshown in Figure 4-3.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the Station A in the Main Topology,and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon where the OLP board is located and select NE Explorer todisplay the NE Explorer dialog box.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree and choose Configuration > PortProtection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane.

5. Check the channel status of the client 1+1 protection. The Working ChannelStatus and the Protection Channel Status is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 131: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1. The switching test of the client 1+1 protection can be performed in two ways.– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the IN optical interface of the

working OTU1 board in station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure4-3.

– Method 2: forced switching. On the T2000, log on into station A. Right-click thedesired protection group, and select Force to Protection Channel to perform theswitching.

2. Query the channel states of the client 1+1 protection in station A.– In the fiber removing mode, Working Channel is 1(RI1/TO1), and Protection

Channel is 2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status is SF; Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is SF Switched.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Channel is 1(RI1/TO1), and ProtectionChannel is 2(RI2/TO2). Working Channel Status and the Protection ChannelStatus is Normal. Switching Status is Force to Protection Channel.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the OLP board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The CLIENT_PORT_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available, no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, right-click the desired protectiongroup and then choose Manual to Working Channel from the short-cut menu. After that,right-click the same protection group again and then choose Clear from the short-cut menu.

– Forced switching mode: Right-click the desired protection group in the ProtectionGroup, and select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Switching Status of the protection group should be Idle.

----End

4.2.4 Testing SW SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the SW SNCP protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe SW SNCP protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing SW SNCP switching is shown in Figure 4-4.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-9

Page 132: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-4 Testing the SW SNCP

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

OADM

2

3 4

EastWest

OADM

1

Signalanalyzer

East West

: Fixed optical attenuator1,2.3,4: OTU Board

Procedurel Connecting Test instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-4.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon of the Station A in the Main Topology,and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click the NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 133: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3. Click the NE in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration > WDM ServiceManagement from the Function Tree. Click SNCP Service Control.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane. The Current Status of SW SNCP should be Normal State.

5. Check the channel status of the SW SNCP. the Channel Status of Working cross-connection is Normal, the Channel Status of Protection cross-connection isNormal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment

1. The switching test of the SW SNCP can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber of the IN optical interface of the 2ndworking OTU in station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 4-4.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control interface of station A,select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu,select Force to Protection to perform the switching.

2. Query the channel states of the SW SNCP protection in station A.

– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isSF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal. CurrentStatus of the protection group is SF Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isNormal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Normal.Current Status of the protection group is Forced (from Working to Protection)Switching State.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the SCC board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The SW_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:

– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to WorkingChannel . After that, right-click the same working cross-connection again, clickFunction. In the displayed menu, choose Clear.

– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and clickFunction. In the displayed menu, select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Current Status of the protection group should be Normal State.

----End

4.2.5 Testing ODUk SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations in which the tributary board and theline board are jointly used as an example to describe the test procedure of the ODUk SNCPprotection switching.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-11

Page 134: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Prerequisite

The ODUk SNCP protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up Diagram

The diagram of testing ODUk SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Testing ODUk SNCP protection switching

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

1

2 3

OADM OADM

4

5 6

EastWest

East West

Signalanalyzer

: Fixed optical attenuator1,4: Tributary Unit 2,3,5,6: Line Unit

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 135: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the tributary board with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the tributary board with the fixed optical attenuator in betweento realize the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-5.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology, and the statusfigure of the NE B is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree. Click SNCPService Control.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list. CurrentStatus of the ODUk SNCP protection is Normal State.

5. Query the channel states of the ODUk SNCP protection. Channel Status of theworking cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the ODUk SNCP protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber between the D1 optical interface onthe OADM board and the IN optical interface on working line board 3 in stationA to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 4-5.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control interface of station A,select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu,select Force to Protection to perform the switching.

2. Check the channel status of ODUk SNCP protection of station A– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection is

SF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal. CurrentStatus of the protection group is SF Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isNormal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Normal.Current Status of the protection group is Forced (from Working to Protection)Switching State.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the SCC board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-13

Page 136: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working . Afterthat, right-click the same working cross-connection again, click Function. In the displayedmenu, choose Clear.

– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and clickFunction. In the displayed menu, select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Current Status of the protection group should be Normal State.

----End

4.2.6 Testing VLAN SNCP Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by two stations as an example to describe the testprocedure of the VLAN SNCP protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe VLAN SNCP protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing VLAN SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 4-6.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 137: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-6 Testing VLAN SNCP protection switching

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

OA

FIU

FIU

OADM OADM

A

B

FIU

FIU

OADM

2

3 4

EastWest

East West

OADM

1

Signalanalyzer

: Fixed optical attenuator1,2.3,4: OTU Board

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-6.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology, and the statusfigure of the NE A is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-15

Page 138: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

3. Select the desired Ethernet board in the NE Explorer, and choose Configuration >Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service .

4. Click the VLAN SNCP Service Management tab. Click Set/Query Switching andselect Query Switching Status, all the current protection groups are displayed.Current Status of VLAN SNCP should be Normal State.

5. Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection. Link Status of the workingservice is Normal, and Link Status of the protection service also is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment

1. The switching test of the VLAN SNCP protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the IN optical interface of theworking OTU 2 in station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure 4-6.

– Method 2: forced switching. On the T2000, log on into station A. In the VLANSNCP Service Management, choose working service, click Set/QuerySwitching. Select Force to Protection in the displayed menu to perform theswitching.

2. Query the channel states of the VLAN SNCP protection in station A.

– In the fiber removing mode, Link Status of the working service is SF, LinkStatus of protection service is Normal, Current Status of the protection groupis Automatic Switching State.

– In the forced switching mode, Link Status of the working service is Normal, LinkStatus of the protection service is Normal, Current Status of the protection groupis Forced (from Working to Protection) Switching State.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the L4G or the TBE board and selectBrowse Current Alarms. The VLAN_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported by the L4Gor the TBE.

4. Test the services by using a signal analyzer. The services should be available, and nobit error is generated.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:

– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Manual toWorking . After that, right-click the same working cross-connection again, click Set/Query Switching. In the displayed menu, choose Clear.

– Forced switching mode: Select the working service, and click Set/QuerySwitching. In the displayed menu, select Clear.

6. Click Set/Query Switching, and select Query Switching Status. Current Statusofthe protection group should be Normal State.

----End

4.2.7 Testing Tributary SNCP Protection SwitchingThis topic considers a ring network as an example to describe the test procedure of the tributarySNCP protection switching. The ring network consists of two stations in which the tributaryboard and the line board are jointly used

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 139: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Prerequisite

The tributary SNCP protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000, optical fiber, flange, signal analyzer, optical attenuator

Test Connection Diagram

The diagram of testing tributary SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Testing tributary SNCP protection switching

OM

FIU

FIU

OM

OD

NS2

TQS2

TQS1

TQS2

TQS1TQS1

TQS2

TQS1

TQS2

NS2

OD

Signalanalyzer

Station A Station B

OLP

OLP

: Fixed Optical Attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. At station A, connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signal analyzer tothe RX and TX interfaces on the client side of the OLP protection board respectivelywith the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. At station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OLP protection board with the fixed optical attenuator inbetween to realize the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-7.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology, and the statusfigure of the NE A is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, choose Configuration> WDM Service Management from the Function Tree, and click SNCP ServiceControl.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-17

Page 140: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list. CurrentStatus of the tributary SNCP protection is Normal State.

5. Query the channel states of the tributary SNCP protection. Channel Status of theworking cross-connection is Normal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment

1. The switching test of the tributary SNCP protection can be performed in two ways:

– Method 1: fiber removing. Remove the fiber in the TXn optical interface onworking line board TQS1 in station A to perform the switching, as shown in Figure4-7.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the SNCP Service Control interface of station A,select the working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu,select Force to Protection to perform the switching.

2. Check the channel status of tributary SNCP protection of station A

– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isSF, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is Normal. CurrentStatus of the protection group is SF Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of the working cross-connection isNormal, and Channel Status of the protection cross-connection is also Normal.Current Status of the protection group is Forced (from Working to Protection)Switching State.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the SCC board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODU_SNCP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. To restore the test environment of the two switching modes in Step 1, the followingtwo modes can be respectively used:

– Fiber removing mode: Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working . Afterthat, right-click the same working cross-connection again, click Function. In the displayedmenu, choose Clear.

– Forced switching mode: Select the working cross-connection, and clickFunction. In the displayed menu, select Clear.

6. Click Query, and Current Status of the protection group should be Normal State.

----End

4.2.8 Testing Board-Level Protection SwitchingThe board-level protection is classified into two modes: the general mode and the extendedmode. In the extended mode, the SCS board is required. This section takes the extended board-level protection by using two OTM stations as an example to describe the test procedure of theboard-level protection switching.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 141: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

PrerequisiteThe board-level protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramFigure 4-8 shows the connection for testing the board-level protection switching.

Figure 4-8 Connection for testing the board-level protection switching

FIU

FIU

L4G

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

TBE1TBE1

TBE2

TBE1

TBE2

L4G

SCS

Signalanalyzer

OADM

OADM

Station A Station B

TI1

RO1

TX1

RX1

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RO1 and output optical interface TI1 on theclient side of the SCS with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the output optical interface TX1 and the input optical interfaceRX1 on the client side of the TBE with the fixed optical attenuator in between torealize the loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-8.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology, and the status figureof the NE A is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane. The switching status of board-level protection should be Idle.

5. Check the board status of board-level protection. If the TBE1 is in slot IU7 and theTBE2 is in slot IU8, then Working Board is 7-TBE; Working Board Status is

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-19

Page 142: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Available; Protection Board is 8-TBE; Protection Board Status is Available, andActive Board is Working Board.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the board-level protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. In station A, remove the fiber of the RX1 interface ofthe TBE1, as shown in Figure 4-8.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the board-level protection user interface of stationA, right-click the desired protection group on the T2000, and select ForcedSwitching to Protection to perform the switching.

2. Check the board status of station A– In the fiber removing mode, Working Board is 7-TBE; Working Board

Status is Unavailable; Protection Board is 8-TBE; Protection Board Status isAvailable; Switching Status is Auto Switching; and Active Board is ProtectionBoard.

– In the forced switching mode, Working Board is 7-TBE, Working BoardStatus is Available; Protection Board is 8-TBE; Protection Board Status isAvailable; Switching Status is Forced Switching to Protection; and ActiveBoard is Protection Board.

3. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

4. If all the previous items meet the requirements, two methods can be used to restorethe switching status to normal.– Reconnect the fiber.

NOTE

If the Revertive Mode field is set to Non-Revertive, select the desired working cross-connection, and click Function. In the displayed menu, choose Manual to Working. Afterthat, right-click the same working cross-connection again, click Function. In the displayedmenu, choose Clear.

– Right-click the desired protection group in the Protection Group, and select ForceSwitching to Working. Select Clear to clear the switching configuration.

5. Click Query, the switching status should be restored to Idle within the time set inWTR Times(s) field.

----End

4.2.9 Testing the Cross-Subrack or Cross-NE DBPS and MS SNCPProtection Switching

This topic describes the testing procedure for the DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching. Inthis topic, the service between station A and station C in a ring that consists of three stations isconsidered as an example.

PrerequisiteAn MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A(or subrack m).

An MS SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station B(or subrack n).

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 143: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

An SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.

A service path is configured between the GE port (TX2/RX2) of the L4G board at station C andthe GE port (TX1/RX1) of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure 4-9.

NOTE

The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRASto another GE port (TX2/RX2) of the L4G. The service data is output through the GE port (IN/OUT) fortransmission over the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the GE port (IN/OUT)of the L4G at station A receives the service data. The service data is output through the GE port (TX1/RX1) of the TBE1 board after the electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of theelectrical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

The fiber connections among station A, station B and station C must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, flange

Background InformationThe cross-subrack (or cross-NE) DBPS protection must work with the MS SNCP protection.

For the MS SNCP protection switching that is triggered by the fault on the OTN side, refer to4.2.4 Testing SW SNCP Protection Switching.

Test Connection DiagramThe diagram of testing DBPS and MS SNCP protection switching is shown in Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 and Figure 4-10 show the DBPS protection and MS SNCP protection in the normaland switching states.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-21

Page 144: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-9 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (normal)

TBE

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

Station B

Master1 2

Master Slave

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX2TX2

SMBP1

TX1RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

L4GL4G

IN OUT INOUT

TX1 RX1

TX1RX1

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

INOUT IN OUT

Service signals

Observed service signals

DSLAM

Station A

C

L4G L4G

L4G

L4G

RX1 TX1

Slave

Station

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 145: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-10 DBPS and MS SNCP protection (switching)

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

A B

C

1 2

RXTX

P2 P3RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1 TX1

SMB P1

TX1RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

IN OUT INOUT

TX1 RX1

TX1RX1

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

INOUT IN OUT

L4GL4G L4G

L4G

RX2TX2

Service signals

Observed service signals

Station

Station Station

Slave

Slave Master

Master

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. SeeFigure 4-9. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send the same packets at the sametime. Make P1 receive the service signals (data packets from P2 or P3) forwarded bythe DSLAM.

2. Create the electrical cross-connection from the IN interface of the L4G to the TX2interface of the TBE1 at station A. For the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

3. Use fibers to connect the output optical interface of the DSLAM to the RX2 interfaceof the L4G at station C so that a loopback is enabled. Then, create the electrical cross-connection from the RX2 interface of the L4G to the OUT interface of the L4G. For

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-23

Page 146: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

the configuration of the electrical cross-connection, refer to the ConfigurationGuide.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of station A, as shown in Figure 4-9.

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology and the status figureof NE A is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, and chooseConfiguration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Workingboard is TBE1,Protection Board Status is Master.

5. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > WDM Service Management.

6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. In this case, theuplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,the TBE1 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections tothe west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of station B, as shown in Figure 4-9.

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology, and the status figureof NE B is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, and chooseConfiguration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.

4. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Workingboard is TBE2, Protection Board Status is Slave.

5. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > WDM Service Management.

6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. In this case, thepass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, thecross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A

1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical interface of TBE1 board in station A to performthe switching, as shown in Figure 4-10.

2. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology, and the status figureof NE A is displayed.

3. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialogbox.

4. In the NE Explorer dialog box, select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-handpane, and choose Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom theFunction Tree.

5. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Workingboard is TBE1,Protection Board Status is Slave.

6. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 147: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

7. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. In this case, thepass-through cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is, thecross-connection passes through the west and east L4G boards.

l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station B, as shown in Figure4-10.1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE B in the Main Topology, and the status figure

of NE B is displayed.2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog

box.3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, and choose

Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.4. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Working

board is TBE2, Working Board Status is Master.5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree.6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. In this case, the

uplink dual fed cross-connection mode is used in the MS SNCP protection. That is,the TBE2 board duplicates the cross-connection and sends the cross-connections tothe west and east L4G boards.

7. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical interface of TBE1 board in station A.l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets received

at P1) / Packet sending speed. The switching time of the transmission equipment must beless than 200ms.

----End

4.2.10 Testing Intra-Subrack DBPS Protection SwitchingThis topic describes the testing procedure for the intra-subrack DBPS protection switching. Inthis topic, the service between station A and station C is considered as an example.

PrerequisiteA SW SNCP protection group and a DBPS protection group must be configured at station A.

A SW SNCP protection group must be configured at station C.

A service path must be configured between the GE port (TX2/RX2) of the L4G board at stationC and the GE port (TX1/RX1) of the TBE board at station A for observation. See Figure4-11.

NOTE

The signal flow of the service path is as follows: The DSLAM forwards the service data from the BRASto another GE port (TX2/RX2) of the L4G. The service data is output through the GE port (IN/OUT) fortransmission over the line after the electrical cross-connection is performed. Then, the GE port (IN/OUT)of the L4G at station A receives the service data. The service data is output through the GE port (TX1/RX1) of the TBE1 board after the electrical cross-connection is performed. For the configuration of theelectrical cross-connection, refer to the Configuration Guide.

The fiber connections among station A, station B and station C must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, flange

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-25

Page 148: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Background InformationThe intra-subrack DBPS protection must work with the SW SNCP protection.

Test Connection DiagramThe diagram of testing intra-subrack DBPS protection switching is shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12 show the DBPS protection and SW SNCP protection in the normaland switching states.

Figure 4-11 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (normal)

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

C

1 2

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1TX1

SMB P1

TX1RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

IN OUT INOUT

INOUT IN OUT

DSLAM

A

TBE

L4GL4G

L4G

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

RX2 TX2Service signals

Observed service signals

Station

Station

Master

Master

Slave

Slave

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 149: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-12 DBPS and SW SNCP protection (switching)

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

L4G

TBE

Bras 1 Bras 2

C

1 2

RXTXP2 P3

RXTX

RX TX RX TX

RX1TX1

SMBP1

TX1RX1 RX2 TX2 RX2 TX2

TX1 RX1TX2 RX2

RXTX

L4G

IN OUT INOUT

INOUT IN OUTA

L4G

TX3 RX1

TX1RX3

RX2 TX2Service signals

Observed service signalsStation

Station

Master

MasterSlave

Slave

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB) at the line convergence point of stations A and B. SeeFigure 4-11. Bind P2 and P3 ports as a group to send packets at the same time. MakeP1 receive the packets (from P2 or P3) forwarded by the DSLAM.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A, as shown in Figure 4-11.1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology, and the status

figure of the NE A is displayed.2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog

box.3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and choose

Configuration > Distributed Board-Level Protection from the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-27

Page 150: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Workingboard is TBE1,Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status is Master,Protection Board Status is Slave.

5. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Managementfrom the Function Tree.

6. Choose WDM Cross-Connection Configuration and click Query. Then, the relatedcross-connections are displayed. In this case, the working and protection L4G boardsin the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE1in the DBPS protection.

l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A

1. Remove the fiber in the RX2 optical interface of TBE1 board in station A to performthe switching, as shown in Figure 4-12.

2. In the NE Explorer dialog box, select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-handpane and chooseConfiguration > Distributed Board-Level Protectionfrom theFunction Tree.

3. Click Query, DBPS protection groups are listed in the protection group list.Workingboard is TBE1,Protection Board is TBE2;Working board Status is Slave,Protection Board Status is Master.

4. Choose Configuration > WDM Service Management from the Function Tree,clickWDM Cross-Connection Configuration.

5. Click Query. Then, the related cross-connections are displayed. In this case, theworking and protection L4G boards in the SW SNCP protection group have cross-connections only with the working TBE2 in the DBPS protection.

6. Reconnect the fiber into the RX2 optical interface of TBE1 board in station A.

l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 or P3 - Packets receivedat P1) / Packet sending speed. The switching time of the transmission equipment must besmaller than 200ms.

----End

4.2.11 Testing DLAG Protection SwitchingThis topic describes the testing procedure for the DLAG protection switching that is triggeredby the line failure after the fiber is removed.

Prerequisite

A DLAG protection group must be configured at station A.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000, SmartBits (SMB), optical fiber, flange

Test Connection Diagram

The diagram of testing DLAG protection switching is shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14 show the status of the DLAG protection.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 151: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-13 DLAG protection (normal)

1 2

P2RXTX

RX1 TX1

SMB P1

TX1RX1

RXTX

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

TBE

RXTX TX RX

TX1RX1

AINOUT

Port1/1

Port2/1 Port2/2

Station

Master Slave

Figure 4-14 DLAG protection (switching)

1 2

P2RXTX

RX1 TX2

SMB P1

TX1RX1

RXTX

TBE

L4G

DSLAM

TBE

RXTX TX RX

TX1RX1

AINOUT

Port2/1 Port2/2

Port1/1

Station

MasterSlave

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. Connect a SmartBits (SMB). See Figure 4-13. Make P2 send data packets and P1receive the data packets.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-29

Page 152: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of station A, as shown in Figure 4-131. Log in to the T2000. Double-click NE A in the Main Topology, and the status figure

of NE A is displayed.2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog

box.3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and choose

Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link Aggregation Management from theFunction Tree.

4. Click Query. In this case, Main Board is TBE1, and Slave Board is TBE2.l Querying the Protection Switching Channel Status of Station A.

1. Remove the fiber in the RX1/TX1 optical interface of the TBE1 board in station A toperform the switching, as shown in Figure 4-14.

2. In the NE Explorer dialog box, select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-handpane and choose Configuration > Ethernet Distributed Link AggregationManagement from the Function Tree.

3. Click Query. In this case, Main Board is TBE2, and Slave Board is TBE1.4. Reconnect the fiber into the RX1/TX1 optical interface of TBE1 board in station A.

l Switching time calculation: Switching time = (Packets sent by P2 - Packets received atP1) / Packet sending speed. The protection switching time must be smaller than 100ms.

----End

4.2.12 Testing ODUk SPRing Protection SwitchingThis section takes a ring network formed by four stations, two adjacent ones of which bearservices, as an example to describe the test procedure of the ODUk SPRing protection switching.

PrerequisiteThe ODUk SPRing protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A and station B must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing ODUk SPRing protection switching is shown in Figure 4-15.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 153: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-15 Testing ODUk SPRing protection switching

OADM

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

FIU OADMFIU

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

OADM FIU OADMFIU

A

B C

D

(East)

(West)

ODU1-2

ODU1-1

ODU1-1ODU1-2

ODU1-1ODU1-2

ODU1-1 ODU1-1

ODU1-1 ODU1-2

ODU1-1

ODU1-1 ODU1-2

ODU1-2 ODU1-2

ODU1-2RxTx

TxRx

Tributary

Line

Line

Signalanalyzer

(East)

(East)

(East)

(West)

(West)

(West)

Line

Line Line

Line

Line

Line Tributary

TributaryTributary

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface RX and output optical interface TX on the clientside of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface RX and the output optical interfaceTX on the client side of the OTU with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-15.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.

l Querying the Normal Channel Status of the Station A

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the NE A in the Main Topology, and the statusfigure of the NE B is displayed.

2. Right-click the desired NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NEExplorer dialog box.

3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and chooseConfiguration > ODUk SPRing Protection from the Function Tree.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-31

Page 154: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in theright-hand pane. The switching status of ODUk SPRing protection should be Idle.

5. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection. The Channel Status of theeast working unit is Normal, the Channel Status of east protection unit is Normal.The Channel Status of west working unit is Normal, the Channel Statusof westprotection unit is Normal.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the ODUk SPRing protection can be performed in two ways.

– Method 1: fiber removing. In station A, remove the fiber of the main opticalchannel from the D1 interface of east OADM board to the IN interface of theworking line board, as shown in Figure 4-15.

– Method 2: forced switching. In the ODUk SPRing protection user interface ofstation A, right-click the desired East Working Unit on the T2000, and selectForced Switching-Ring to perform the switching.

2. Check the channel status of the ODUk SPRing protection of station A.– In the fiber removing mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit is SF;

Channel Status of East Protection Unit is Normal; and Switching Status isEast Switching.

– In the forced switching mode, Channel Status of East Working Unit isNormal; Channel Status of East Protection Unit is also Normal; and SwitchingStatus is East Switching.

3. In the NE panel of the Station A, right-click the SCC board and select Browse CurrentAlarms. The ODUKSP_PS alarm must be reported.

4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services shouldbe available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. If all the previous items meet the requirements, two methods can be used to restorethe switching status to normal.– Reconnect the fiber.

– Right-click the desired protection group in the East Protection Unit, and selectClear.

6. Click Query, the switching status should be restored to Idle.

----End

4.2.13 Testing Optical Wavelength Shared Protection SwitchingOptiX OSN 6800 supports OWSP (optical wavelength shared protection) protection. Thissection describes the testing procedure for the OWSP protection. In this section, two adjacentstations with services in a ring that consists of four stations are used as an example for illustration.

PrerequisiteThe OWSP protection must be configured.

The fiber connections between station A, station B, station C and station D must be complete.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, signal analyzer, optical fiber, flange, optical attenuator

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 155: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Set-up DiagramThe diagram of testing optical wavelength shared protection switching is shown in Figure4-16.

Figure 4-16 Testing optical wavelength shared protection switching

OTU2 OTU1 OTU2 OTU1

2 x DCP

OTU1 OTU2 OTU1 OTU2

OADM(West)

OADM(East)

FIU

FIU

OADM

FIU OADMFIU

OADM

FIU

FIU

OADM

OADM FIU OADMFIU

λ2/λ1 λ1/λ2

λ2/λ1

λ2λ1

λ1λ 2

λ2λ1

λ1λ2

λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1 λ2λ1

λ2λ1

A

B C

D

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2 λ2/λ1

λ2/λ1

2 x DCP

2 x DCP2 x DCPλ2/λ1

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2

λ1/λ2λ2/λ1

λ1/λ2 λ1λ 2

λ1λ 2

(East)

(East)

(East)

(West)

(West)

(West)

RxTxRxTx

TxRxTxRx

Signal analyzer

: Working signal : Protection signal

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedurel Connecting Test Instruments

1. In station A, respectively connect the output and input optical interfaces of the signalanalyzer to the input optical interface Rx and output optical interface Tx on the clientside of the OTU1 with the fixed optical attenuator in between.

2. In station B, connect the input optical interface Rx and the output optical interface Txon the client side of the OTU2 with the fixed optical attenuator in between to realizethe loopback on the client side, as shown in Figure 4-16.

3. Test the channel by using a signal analyzer to ensure that no bit error is generated.l Querying the Normal Channel Status of Station A

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-33

Page 156: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

1. Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon of station A in the Main Topology,and the status figure of the ONE is displayed.

2. Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.3. Select the NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and choose

Configuration > Optical Wavelength Shared Protection from the Function Tree.4. Click Query, and all protection groups are listed in the protection group list in the

right-hand pane. The switching status of the OWSP protection should be Idle.5. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection. East Working Channel is 4-

DCP-1(RI11), Channel Status is Normal. East Protection Channel is 2-DCP-2(RI12), Channel Status is Normal. West Working Channel is 2-DCP-1(RI11),Channel Status is Normal. West Protection Channel is 4-DCP-2(RI12), ChannelStatus is Normal.

NOTE

"4" in 4-DCP-2(RI12) is the slot number as supposed.

l Testing the Protection Switching of the Equipment1. The switching test of the OWSP protection can be performed in two ways:

– Remove the fiber of the main optical channel from D1 interface of the east OADMto the RI11 interface of the DCP, as shown in Figure 4-16.

– Right-click the East Working Channel on the T2000, select Forced Switching-Ring to perform the switching.

2. Check the channel status of the OWSP protection of station A, which should beconsistent with the actual situation.– After the fiber of the main optical channel is removed, the status of East Working

Channel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11), the value of Channel Status is SF, thestatus of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12), the value ofChannel Status is Normal and the value of Switching Status is EastSwitching.

– After the Forced Switching-Ring is selected, the status of East WorkingChannel is displayed as 4-DCP-1(RI11), the value of Channel Status isNormal, the status of East Protection Channel is displayed as 2-DCP-2(RI12),the value of Channel Status is Normal, the value of Switching Status is EastSwitching.

3. Query the alarms on the T2000. The OWSP_PS alarm must be reported by SCC.4. Test the services and switching time by using a signal analyzer. The services should

be available , no bit error is generated, and the switching time should be less than 50ms.

5. If all the previous items meet the requirements, two methods can be used to restorethe switching status to normal.– Reconnect the fiber.– Right-click East Working Channel, and select Clear.

6. Click Query, the switching status should be restored to Idle.

----End

4.3 Testing System FeaturesThe system features are IPA, ALC, APE, and EAPE.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 157: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4.3.1 Testing IPAThis section describes how to test the IPA function.

4.3.2 Testing ALCThis section describes how to test ALC function.

4.3.3 Testing APEThe APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end and thus ensures thesignal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to check if the APE function is started.

4.3.4 Testing EAPEThis section describes how to test EAPE function.

4.3.1 Testing IPAThis section describes how to test the IPA function.

Prerequisite

Optical power commissioning must be completed.

The IPA must be configured.

Tools, Equipment and Materials

T2000, optical power meter

Background Information

The IPA can be rebooted by using three methods: automatic reboot, manual reboot, testingreboot .

This section takes the manual reboot as an example to describe the procedure for testing IPA.

IPA Verification Diagram

For the IPA verification diagram, see Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 IPA verification diagram

fiber break

Station A Station B

Opticalamplifier unit 1

Opticalamplifier unit 2

Opticalamplifier unit 3

Opticalamplifier unit 4

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-35

Page 158: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the T2000. Double-click the ONE icon in the Main Topology, and the status figure ofthe ONE is displayed.

Step 2 Right-click a NE icon and select NE Explorer to display the NE Explorer dialog box.

Step 3 Select a NE from the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane and choose Configuration > IPAManagement from the Function Tree

Step 4 In IPA Protection in the right-hand pane, set the IPA Status to Enabled.

Step 5 Remove the fiber of output interface of the OAU1.

NOTE

In the case of the IPA function, if the Raman amplifier is configured and the optical supervisory channel(OSC) board functions as the auxiliary detection board, you need to remove the fiber from the OUT interfaceof the amplifier board 1 and the fiber from the output interface of the OSC board.

Step 6 Log in the NE A and NE B separately. In the Navigator Tree in the left-hand pane, chooseConfiguration > IPA Management.

Step 7 In IPA Protection, select the desired IPA protection pair. Then right-click the Status column,and select Query State. The state Power off should be displayed.

Step 8 Insert the fiber of output interface of the OAU1.

Step 9 In IPA Protection, click Manual Reboot, and a message indicating a successful operation isdisplayed in the prompt dialog box.

NOTE

Click Manual Reboot, and the laser shut down should be open again after the off period of the laser.

Step 10 Click Close.

Step 11 In IPA Protection, select Status, and then right-click Query State. Restart should be displayed.After the Off Period, the board state is displayed as Power on.

----End

Related InformationFor details on the function, principle, and how to configure IPA protection groups, refer to theFeature Description.

4.3.2 Testing ALCThis section describes how to test ALC function.

PrerequisiteThe ALC Link must be created. And the parameters must be configured according to Table12-2 in the Feature Description.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, optical power meter

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 159: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

ALC Verification DiagramFor the ALC verification diagram, see Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 ALC verification diagram

Opticalamplifier unit 1

Opticalamplifier unit 2

Opticalamplifier unit 3

Opticalamplifier unit 4

Procedure

Step 1 Enable the ALC after creating ALC links.

Step 2 In the ALC link, adjust the variable optical attenuator (VOA) between optical amplifier boards1 and 2 to increase the attenuation between the two amplifier boards by 3 dB.

Step 3 Query the input optical power of the OAU2 on the T2000. Compare the test value with the inputoptical power before adjusting the VOA to ensure that the former optical power is 3 dB lower.

Step 4 Query the output optical power of the OAU2, the input and output optical power of the OAU3on the T2000. Compare the test values with the value before adjustment to check whether theyare the same. If that is the case, it indicates that the ALC has been enabled.

NOTE

If the OAU1 is the adjustment board, use the following formulaAdjustment range of the OAU1 with DCM = Adjustment range of the OAU1 without DCM - DCM insertionloss - 1 dBm

----End

Related InformationFor details on the function, principle and how to configure ALC links, refer to the FeatureDescription.

4.3.3 Testing APEThe APE function ensures the optical power flatness at the receive end and thus ensures thesignal-to-noise ratio. The APE test is performed to check if the APE function is started.

PrerequisiteThe system optical power commissioning must be completed.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Background InformationWhen the flatness of the optical power of each channel at the receive end differs greatly fromthat configured in deployment commissioning, the APE function can automatically adjust the

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-37

Page 160: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

optical power of each channel at the transmit end. This ensures that the flatness of the opticalpower at the receive end is close to that configured in deployment commissioning. For detaileddescription of the APE, refer to the Feature Description.

In the OptiX OSN 6800, the boards supporting APE function are the M40V, WSM9, WSMD4,ROAM and RMU9 boards. This section describes the APE commissioning on the M40V board.

This section takes the M40V as an example to describes the APE function.

The following descriptions provide the details of commissioning the APE from west to east. Thecommissioning of the APE from east to west is the same as the commissioning from west toeast.

The APE function testing configuration is described in Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 The APE function test configuration diagram

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OA

M40V

D40

D40

M40V

OTU

SC1 SC1

MCAOTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the APE function on the T2000. Set the standard optical power curve and thewavelength to be checked, and then save the configuration data.

NOTE

It is recommended to set the power unbalance threshold to 1.5 dB. For details on how to configure the APEfunction and how to start the APE function on the T2000, refer to the Configuration Guide.

Step 2 Add more VOAs at any OTU WDM-side output port, and adjust the attenuation to minimum.

Step 3 Step up the attenuation of the VOA until the MCA detects that the optical power of the channelhas decreased by 3 dB.

NOTE

l The attenuation of a channel is configurable. The attenuation of a channel must be higher than thepower unbalance threshold. It is recommended that the attenuation of a channel is set to 3 dB.

l The ALC function is probably enabled after the optical power decreases.

l After the MCA scan cycle, the APE event report dialog window appears, indicating that the power isunbalanced.

Step 4 On the T2000, start the APE function. After the APE adjusts the power, the difference betweenthe system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standard optical power curveflatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 161: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

NOTE

The APE must finish adjusting the power within 5 minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event reportdialog window appears, indicating that the adjustment is successful.

Step 5 Remove the VOAs at the OTU WDM-side output port added in step 2.

Step 6 On the T2000, start the APE function. After the APE adjusts the power, the difference betweenthe system optical power curve flatness at the receive end and the standard optical power curveflatness should be less than the power unbalance threshold.

NOTE

The APE must finish adjusting the power within 5 minutes. After the adjustment, the APE event reportdialog window appears, indicating that the adjustment is successful.

----End

4.3.4 Testing EAPEThis section describes how to test EAPE function.

PrerequisiteOptical power commissioning must be completed.

There is no optical power alarm or bit error alarm in the system.

The EAPE functions of the related trails are enabled.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000, Optical power meter, VOA

Background InformationWhen the receive performance of each channel at the receive end of the system changes greatly,the EAPE function adjusts the optical power of each channel at the transmit end. In this way, itis ensured that the performance of the optical signals at the receive end is close to that in thedeployment commissioning.

This section considers the west-to-east signal flow, the L4G, and the VA4 as an example todescribe the EAPE commissioning, and the EAPE function is configured to the OCh trail wherethe L4G is located.

EAPE Verification DiagramFor the EAPE verification diagram, see Figure 4-20.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-39

Page 162: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-20 EAPE verification diagram

FIU

FIU

OA

OA OA

OAMR4

MR4

MR4

MR4

L4G

SC1 SC1

LSX

L4G

LSX

L4G

LSX

L4G

LSX

VA4

VA4

West East

Procedure

Step 1 Add a variable optical attenuator at the output interface of the source L4G board. Adjust theattenuation to the minimum value.

Step 2 In main menu, choose Fault > Browse Abnormal Events.

Step 3 In the Object Tree, select the NE and click .

Step 4 Click Query, and the abnormal events are listed in the right-hand pane.

Step 5 Increase the attenuation of the VOA section by section and click Refresh. Stop the adjustmentuntil EAPE abnormal event notification is displayed in the abnormal event list. In this case,the EAPE adjustment needs to be started. The adjustment steps are as follows.

Step 6 On the T2000, select Trail > WDM Trail Management.

Step 7 In the Set Trail Browse Filter Condition dialog box, select a proper filtering condition.

Step 8 Select the OCh trail where the L4G board is located. click Maintenance, and then select EAPEManagement from the drop-down list.

Step 9 If Status is Can Be Adjusted. Click Start Adjustmentto Start EAPE adjustment. TheOperation Result dialog box appears, indicating that the verification is successful. After theadjustment completes, Status isAdjustment Not Required.

Step 10 Repeat Step 2 through Step 4. Check the abnormal event list. EAPE adjustment result eventnotification should be reported, indicating the adjustment is successful.

----End

Related Information

For details on the description and how to configure EAPE function, refer to the FeatureDescription.

The recommended commissioning environment is that there are more than three amplifier boardsand long fibers are used in the line.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 163: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4.4 Testing Bit ErrorsThe network-wide bit error test must cover all the service channels in the network. You canperform the bit error tests to the concatenated service channels or to the service segments. Theremust be no bit error in consecutive 24 hours.

This section takes Project G as an example to illustrate the test of network-wide bit errors. Forthe network diagram of Project G, see Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Network diagram of Project G

A B C D E

: OTM : OLA : OADM

Each of the stations A, C and E has four LSX board.

CAUTIONBefore the test, make sure that the input and output optical power of each board is in the optimalrange, and that there is no abnormal alarm or performance event.

4.4.1 Testing the 10-Minute Bit Errors of Each Optical ChannelTo ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is complete successfully, perform a 10-minute bit error test to each channel in advance.

4.4.2 Testing All-Channel Bit ErrorsThe all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all the function units and channels inthe transmission link are normal.

4.4.1 Testing the 10-Minute Bit Errors of Each Optical ChannelTo ensure that the 24-hour network-wide bit error test is complete successfully, perform a 10-minute bit error test to each channel in advance.

PrerequisiteThere must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.

Tools, Equipments and MaterialsSignal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, flange

Testing DiagramFor the bit error test of one channel of the LSX, see Figure 4-22.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-41

Page 164: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Figure 4-22 Testing bit errors of one channel

LSXSignal

analyzer LSX

Station A Station E

OUT

IN

Rx

Tx Rx

Tx

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedure

Step 1 In station A, respectively connect the receive and transmit optical interfaces of a signal analyzerto the output optical interface TX and input optical interface RX with the fixed optical attenuatorin between.

Step 2 In station E, connect the output optical interface TX to the input optical interface RX with afixed optical attenuator in between to realize the loopback on the client side.

Step 3 Use the signal analyzer to perform a 10-minute bit error test to the service channel.

Step 4 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 10-minute bit error test again until there isno bit error.

Step 5 Refer to steps 1 to 4, perform 10-minute bit error tests to all the channels between station A andstation C, between station C and station E, and between station A and station E.

----End

4.4.2 Testing All-Channel Bit ErrorsThe all-channel bit error test is performed to ensure that all the function units and channels inthe transmission link are normal.

Prerequisite

There must be no abnormal alarm or performance event in the entire network.

Tools, Equipments and Materials

Signal analyzer, fiber jumper, optical attenuator, flange

Fiber Connection

At the local end, connect the transmit optical interface of the signal analyzer to the RX interfaceof the first OTU. After remote loopback, the signal is output from the TX interface of the firstOTU. That is the connection of single channel. Connect the TX interface of the first OTU to theRX interface of the second OTU with a fixed optical attenuator. Then connect the second OTUand the third OTU in the same way. Connect the OTUs by the same way until the OTU N torealize the cascading of N channels. At the end, connect the TX interface of the OTU N to thereceive optical interface of the signal analyzer.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 165: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Precautions

CAUTIONl The number of cascaded OTUs should be less than or equal to 13.

l There are five types of LC connector-shape fixed optical attenuators: 15 dB, 10 dB, 7dB, 5dB and 2 dB. According to the requirement of the optical power, use the fixed opticalattenuators of a proper type when you perform the network commissioning.

Testing Diagram

This section takes Project G as an example to illustrate the test of all-channel cascading. For thefiber connection of all-channel bit error test, see Figure 4-23. Because no signals are insertedinto or extracted from the OLA station and repeater station, no symbols of them are included inthe following figure.

Figure 4-23 Fiber connection of all-channel bit error test

LSX1

LSX2

LSX3

LSX4

LSX1

LSX2

LSX3

LSX4

LSX1

Station A

LSX2

LSX3

LSX4

Signalanalyzer

IN

RxOUT

Tx

Station C

Station E

: Fixed optical attenuator

Procedure

Step 1 Follow Figure 4-23, and connect the fibers according to Fiber Connection.

Step 2 Use the signal analyzer to perform the 24-hour bit error test.

Step 3 If there are bit errors, clear the fault and perform a 24-hour test again until there is no bit error.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-43

Page 166: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

4.5 Testing Orderwire FunctionsOrderwire function test consists of addressing call test and conference call test.

Prerequisitel Orderwire in each NE must be configured.

l The orderwire phone set must be installed correctly in related stations.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Procedure

Step 1 Testing the Addressing Call.1. In a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the orderwire of other NEs.2. Check whether the orderwire phone of the called station rings.3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.4. Refer to previous steps to test the addressing call at other stations.

Step 2 Testing the Subnet Conference Call.1. In a station, use the orderwire phone to dial the subnet conference call number.2. Check whether the orderwire phone of the other station rings.3. Check the voice quality during the conversation. The voice must be clear and without noise.4. Refer to previous steps to test the subnet conference call at other stations.

----End

4.6 Backing Up NE DatabaseAfter the configuration data is delivered, it is required to backup the NE database. The NEdatabase can ensure that the SCC restores to normal operation automatically upon data loss orpower failure.

PrerequisiteThe NE must have been configured.

Tools, Equipment and MaterialsT2000

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the T2000. In the Main Topology, select Configuration > Configuration DataManagement.

4 Commissioning NetworkOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

4-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 167: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 2 Select the NE with database to be backed up in the left-hand pane. Click the double-right-arrowbutton.

Step 3 Select the NE to be backed up from the list on the right-hand pane.

Step 4 Right-click the NE and select Backup to Database from the drop-down menu.

Step 5 Click OK in the prompt box.

----End

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide 4 Commissioning Network

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

4-45

Page 168: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 169: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

A Commissioning CRPC Board

This section describes how to commission CRPC board.

Procedure

Step 1 Checking your protective clothing and noting the precautions1. Be aware of the laser security level, possible injury and protective precautions.2. Wear laser-protective glasses (Class 4). Wear long-sleeve antistatic coat, shoe covers, and

protective gloves.3. Confirm the amount of adopted CRPC boards. Be familiar with the connection between

these fibers and the upstream/downstream sites. Be familiar with the location of theconnector. Take the drawings into the equipment room.

4. Prepare tools for fiber cleaning: CLETOP cassette cleaner, fiber microscope (400x orabove). Ethyl Alcohol with wipes. Only use a video scope.

Step 2 Checking fiber connection for CRPC boards before cabinet power-on

CAUTIONl Strictly follow the following procedure which is significant for operation security.

l The LINE port of CRPC board has extremely high output optical power. Be very carefulduring operation.

1. Ensure that the cabinet is in power-off state before any operation.2. Check whether the SYS port of the CRPC board is well-connected to the IN port of the FIU

board with fibers.3. The connection surface should have no dust or scratch. If there is any, immediately replace

the line-side fiber. (It is recommended that the customer prepares spare fibers.)

Step 3 Connecting LINE-side fiber and powering on the cabinet1. Connect one end of the line-side fiber to the ODF frame.2. Connect another end of the line-side fiber to the LINE port of the CRPC board.3. Insert the CRPC board. Power on the cabinet.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide A Commissioning CRPC Board

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

A-1

Page 170: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Step 4 Checking laser and IPA status of CRPC board1. Log in T2000, enter the Optical NE Explorer.2. Choose Configuration > IPA Management from the left hand Navigator Tree.3. Make sure that the IPA Status is Close. If it is not, set IPA Status to Close, and click

Apply.4. Select the desired CRPC from the left-hand Navigator Tree and choose Configuration >

WDM Interface.5. Select By Board/Port (Path).6. Click the General Attributes tab, and ensure that the Laser Status of the CRPC-1(LINE)-1

port and the CRPC-1(LINE)-2 of Raman board WDM Interface is Close.

Step 5 Adjusting optical power of CRPC boards in the receive direction.

CAUTIONl If the IPA status is enabled, shut down the pump lasers of the CRPC before deleting IPA.

l If the IPA status is enabled, modify the parameters of the IPA can make the laser status ofthe CRPC to open. At this time, avoid the damage to human body when operating the fiberconnected to the CRPC.

1. Disconnect the fiber between the SYS port of the CRPC board and the IN port of the FIUboard.

2. Connect the fiber from the SYS port to the test port of the spectrum analyzer. Scan thespectrum and obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

3. Reconnect the SYS port of the CRPC board to the IN port of the FIU board.4. Log in T2000, choose Configuration > IPA Management from the left hand Navigator

Tree.

A Commissioning CRPC BoardOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 171: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

5. Set IPA Status to Enabled.

NOTE

If the IPA status is enabled, shut down the pump lasers of the CRPC before deleting IPA.

6. Select the desired CRPC from the left-hand Navigator Tree and choose Configuration >WDM Interface.

7. Select By Board/Port (Path), and click the Advanced Attributes tab.8. Set the optical power of the pump laser to the recommended value in the Fixed Pump

Optical Power. For details, refer to the following description.

NOTE

The on-off gain of each channel must be greater than 10 dB, which is required by the reverse Ramanamplifier. The gain medium of the reverse Raman amplifier is transmission fiber, so the gain valuedepends on the type, length and attenuation of the transmission fiber. If the gain values are requiredto be the same, different fibers should correspond to different optical power of pumps. Set the initialoptical power of the Raman amplifier during network commissioning to the optical power values inthe following table.

Table A-1 Recommended optical power values of Raman pump of different fibers.

Fiber TypeP1(Optical Power of PumpGroup 1)

P2(Optical Power of PumpGroup 2)

G.652/ G.655 24.0 dBm 24.0 dBm

G.653 23.0 dBm 22.5 dBm

9. Select General attributes on the T2000. Set the Laser Statusof the CRPC-1(LINE)-1 portand the CRPC-1(LINE)-2 port of the WDM Interface items to Open.

10. Connect the fiber from the MON port of the CRPC board to the test port of the spectrumanalyzer. Scan the spectrum and obtain the actual signal optical power and record it.

11. Calculate the on-off gain of SYS port by using the following formula:

SYS on-off gain = MON output power (CRPC laser enabled) + 20 – SYS output power(CRPC laser disabled)

NOTE

This gain value should be 1 dB greater than the actual gain value.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide A Commissioning CRPC Board

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

A-3

Page 172: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

12. If the on-off gain is smaller than 10 dB, you can properly increase the optical power of thetwo groups of pumps. Increase the optical power of both groups of pumps by 0.1 dBrespectively at a time till the minimum on-off gain of each channel is greater than 10 dB.Note that no PUM_BCM_ALM alarm should occur under the set pump optical power. Ifthis alarm occurs, the pump optical power set is excessive and must be decreased. If thisalarm occurs while the gain does not reach 10 dB, shut down the pump lasers and checkthe fibers. Replace the fibers if necessary.

Step 6 Adjusting the pump power to ensure that the gain spectrum meets the requirement

After adjusting the on-off gain to 10 dB, compare whether the gain flatness of each wavelengthis within 3 dB or not. If yes, the gain flatness requires no adjustment.

If the gain flatness of each wavelength exceeds 3 dB, adjust the pump optical power accordingto the Raman gain spectrum to improve the gain flatness. Perform as follows:

1. Find the wavelengths of the highest and lowest gains.2. If the shortwave gain is low, increase the optical power of pump laser group 1 to elevate

the shortwave gain or decrease the optical power of pump laser group 2 to lower the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dB till the optical power differencemeets the requirement that the gain flatness of each wavelength is within 3 dB.

3. If the shortwave gain is high, decrease the optical power of pump laser group 1 to lowerthe shortwave gain or increase the optical power of pump laser group 2 to elevate the long-wave gain. Adjust the pump optical power in steps of 0.1 dB till the optical power differencemeets the requirement that the gain flatness of each wavelength is within 3 dB.

4. Retest the on-off gains to check whether the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than10 dB or not. If not, increase the optical power of both pump laser groups 1 and 2 in stepsof 0.1 dB till the on-off gain of each wavelength is greater than 10 dB.

NOTE

After step (3), the pump optical power is changed. As a result, the on-off gains need be retested. If the on-off gain of any wavelength is smaller than 10 dB (or the specified in section 1.2.8), the optical power ofboth pump laser groups 1 and 2 need be increased to meet the gain requirement on the basis of that thedifference between P1 and P2 must not be changed. Add 0.1 dB to P1 and P2 each time until the gain ofall channels is more than 10 dB.

----End

A Commissioning CRPC BoardOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 173: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

B Glossary

Numerics

1+1 protection A protection mechanism in which the same service is sent to the working and protectionchannels (dual fed) at the transmit end and the receive end selects the service in theworking channel under normal situations. When the working channel is faulty. Thereceive end selects the service in the protection channel. It is also called single-endedswitching, that is, switching occurs only at the receive end. This protection mechanismis applicable to channel level protection, board level protection, and even equipmentlevel protection.

A

Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or anemergency has occurred. See also Event.

ALC link A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (singlestation) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils opticalpower control on the line that contains the link.

ALC node The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node worktogether to achieve the ALC function.

APD Avalanche Photodiode. A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection andamplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a regionwhere they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but requirehigher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.

B

Back up A method to copy the important data into a backing storage in case that the original isdamaged or corrupted.

C

Channel The trail at the channel layer.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide B Glossary

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

B-1

Page 174: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Configuration data The data that configures the NE hardware for coordination between this NE and otherNEs in the entire network, and for operation of specified services. Configuration data isthe instruction file of NEs, and it is a key element to ensure that the network runsefficiently. The typical configuration data includes board configuration, clockconfiguration and protection relationship.

Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.

Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections"capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between theirrespective inputs and outputs.

CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals atmultiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between opticalchannels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.

D

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module. A module, which contains dispersion compensationfibers to compensate for the positive dispersion of transmitting fiber.

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the characteristics ofbroad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiplewavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channelsto transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.

E

EDFA Erbium Coped Fiber Amplifier. An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. Thedevice uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium andthe energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifierpasses the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specificwavelength range.

ESC Electric Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes the communication among all thenodes and transmits the monitoring data in the optical transmission network. Themonitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted withservice signals.

ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host with variouscontrol units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. Thetransmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

ESD Electrostatic Discharge. The phenomena the energy being produced by electrostaticresource discharge instantly.

Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers. It is a broadcastnetworking technology that can use several different physical media, including twistedpair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonlyused with Ethernet networks.

F

Fault A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This does not includean inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions.

B GlossaryOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 175: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Fiber jumper The fiber which is used to connect the subrack with the ODF, subrack or connect theboard interfaces.

Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the T2000 or NEsoftware, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets thathave the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow isbased on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.

Forward errorcorrection

A data encoding technology. It is a method to control errors in communication. In thismethod, extra (redundant) bits are inserted into the data stream towards other equipmentto control errors. The equipment at the receive end can use these redundant bits to detecterrors and correct errors if possible.

Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot canbe identified.

G

Gain The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the opticalamplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,which expressed in dB.

H

Hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interfaceto the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.

I

IP address The only address in the TCP/IP protocol that is used to identify the communication port.The IP address consists of four bytes in the decimal format, for example, 129.9.161.55.

IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment. The technology that the system reduces the optical powerof all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety levelif the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signalsmay due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipments trend to be inferior or theconnector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laserbeing sent out from the slice of broken fiber.

L

Label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

Laser The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths.Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the usedlight source in fiber-optic system.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide B Glossary

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

B-3

Page 176: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

M

Main Topology The default T2000 client interface, a basic component of the human-machine interactiveinterface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of differentNEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic networkoperation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

Main Topology The default T2000 client interface, a basic component of the human-machine interactiveinterface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of differentNEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic networkoperation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.

Mapping The process by which tributary signals are adapted into the corresponding virtualcontainer at the PDH/SDH edge.

MO Managed Object. The management view of a resource within the telecommunicationenvironment that may be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objectsare: equipment, receive port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container,multiplex section, and regenerator section.

N

NE A network unit, including the hardware and software. Normally a network unit has atleast one SCC board, which manages and monitors the entire network unit. NE softwareruns on the SCC board.

Network segment Consists of the network components that provide a virtual connection between two circuitsections. The network provider is responsible for the performance of the network section.

O

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer. A device that can be used to add the optical signals ofvarious wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengthsfrom one channel.

ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

ODF Optical Distribution Frame. A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

OLA A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input opticalsignals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA isthe EDFA amplifier.

OLP A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and single-ended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibersforms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line isnormal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carriesline signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.

ONE Optical Network Element. An independent physical entity in an optical transmissionnetwork. An ONE provides the functions that are similar to an NE. The ONE can be anOTM, OLA, or OADM. One ONE can consist of multiple NEs.

Optical Amplifier A device or subsystem in which optical signals are amplified by means of photon energytransfer.

B GlossaryOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 177: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that theoptical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It isavailable in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.

Optical spectrumanalyzer

An instrument that scans the spectrum to record power, measures the value of lossinsertion and tests the performance of the wavelength and optical signal noise ratio(OSNR) of each channel.

Optical wavelengthshared protection

In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection betweendifferent stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelengthsharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelengthshared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured withdistributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network whereservices are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one serviceamong stations.

Orderwire The link that provides voice communication between stations for operators ormaintenance engineers.

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel. A technology realizes communication among nodes inoptical transmission network and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (thewavelength of the working channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the correspondingprotection one is 1625 nm).

OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signalto the noise on the received signal.

OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signalsinto the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

P

Pass-Through A mode in which the transmission equipment directly forwards the received services tothe next station and the local station only detects the signal quality.

PIN Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- andn-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.

Pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect tothe frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

R

Receiver sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER.

Ring network One type of network that all network nodes are connected one after one to be a cycle.

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide B Glossary

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

B-5

Page 178: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

S

SD Signal Degrade. A signal that indicates the associated data has degraded in the sense thata degraded defect condition is active.

Service protection A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.

Settings Parameters of an operation that can be selected by the user.

SF Signal Fail. A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.

Side panel The panel on the side of the cabinet.

Subnet The logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of networkmanagement objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. A subnet planningcan enhance the organization of a network view.

Support The frame on the bottom of a cabinet, when installing the cabinet on the antistatic floor.

T

T2000 A network management system that Huawei provides to manage transmission networks.The T2000 is located between the NE level and the network level in thetelecommunication management network structure. That is, the T2000 is a subnetworkmanagement system. The T2000 provides all management functions at the NE layer andsome of the management functions at the network layer.

T2000-LCT A simplified version of the T2000. The T2000-LCT is located at the NE managementlayer in an optical transmission network. It can manage SDH and WDM series opticaltransmission equipment.

TCP/IP One of the key protocols in the Internal protocol suite. The hosts that connect to eachother through the TCP protocol can create connection between each other and exchangedata. The TCP protocol ensures that the data can be transmitted from the transmitter tothe receiver in a reliable and orderly manner. The TCP can also distinguish data for theconcurrent applications on the same host.

U

User The user of the T2000 client, and the user and password define the correspondingauthority of operation and management of the T2000.

W

Washer A washer which is used to level the cabinet.

WTR Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet the restoralthreshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTRperiod unless it is pre-empted by a higher priority bridge request.

B GlossaryOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

B-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 179: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ALC Automatic Level Control

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photo Diode

APE Automatic Power Equilibrium

C

CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex

D

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexer

E

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

F

FEC Forward error correction

FOADM Fixed Optical add/drop Multiplexer

G

GUI Graphical User Interface

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

C-1

Page 180: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

I

IC Integrated Circuit

ID Identity

IP Internet Protocol

IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment

L

LAN Local Area Network

LCT Local Craft Terminal

N

NE Network Element

NM Network Management

O

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

ODF Optical Distribution Frame

ODUk Optical Channel Data Unit-k

OLA Optical Line Amplifier

OLP Optical Line Protection

OSC Optical Supervisory Channel

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSNR Optical Signal-to-noise Ratio

OTM Optical Transport Module

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PGND Protection Ground

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)

Page 181: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

PIN Positive Intrinsic Negative

R

ROADM Reconfiguration Optical Add/drop Multiplexer

S

SCC System Control & Communication

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

V

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplex

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

C-3

Page 182: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)
Page 183: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Index

AALC testing, 4-36

Bbackup the NE database, 4-44bit error

10-minute bit error, 4-41all-channel bit error, 4-42

board, 2-16tunable wavelengths, 2-16WDM interface attributes, 2-16

Ccommissioning condition check, 1-9connect the T2000 server, 2-3creating, 2-16creating in graphic mode, 2-25creating optical network element, 2-8

DDCM, 3-24

EEAPE testing, 4-39ESD, 1-5ESD wrist strap, 1-5

Ffibers, 2-25

Iinstrument and tool, 1-7, 3-5intra-board 1+1 protection switching test, 4-6IPA testing, 4-35

Mmanually extended ECC communication

setting, 2-23master/slave subrack

setting, 2-20

NNE

creating by manually, 2-11creating by searching, 2-10

NE IDsetting, 2-13

NE IPsetting, 2-13

NE time synchronizationsynchronizing NE time with the T2000 servermanually, 2-18

Ooptical line protection switching test, 4-4optical power commissioning

d40v, 3-14EDFA, 3-8fiu, 3-15foadm board, 3-16line board, 3-7m40v, 3-14osc board, 3-12otu, 3-5Raman amplifier board, 3-10ROAM, 3-17tributary board, 3-7WSD9+RMU9, 3-20WSD9+WSM9, 3-19WSMD4+WSMD4, 3-22

OWSP protection switching test, 4-32

Pperformance monitoring

start, 2-20stop, 2-20

OptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport PlatformCommissioning Guide Index

Issue 01 (2008-08-01) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

i-1

Page 184: Commissioning Guide(V100R004 01)

Ssafe usage of fiber, 1-3safety operation

alarm symbol, 1-2safety symbol, 1-2

software version, 4-2starting T2000

logging in to T2000 client, 2-6starting T2000 server, 2-6

TT2000 client

login, 2-6T2000 server

starting, 2-6testing APE, 4-37testing connection point, 1-9testing orderwire function, 4-44

IndexOptiX OSN 6800 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform

Commissioning Guide

i-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 01 (2008-08-01)